WO2024001972A1 - Interaction method and related device - Google Patents

Interaction method and related device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024001972A1
WO2024001972A1 PCT/CN2023/102184 CN2023102184W WO2024001972A1 WO 2024001972 A1 WO2024001972 A1 WO 2024001972A1 CN 2023102184 W CN2023102184 W CN 2023102184W WO 2024001972 A1 WO2024001972 A1 WO 2024001972A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
electronic device
data
user
application
option
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/102184
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
潘钦旭
陈劲龙
冒晶晶
易见
周未来
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2024001972A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024001972A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0481Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] based on specific properties of the displayed interaction object or a metaphor-based environment, e.g. interaction with desktop elements like windows or icons, or assisted by a cursor's changing behaviour or appearance
    • G06F3/04817Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] based on specific properties of the displayed interaction object or a metaphor-based environment, e.g. interaction with desktop elements like windows or icons, or assisted by a cursor's changing behaviour or appearance using icons
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0484Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] for the control of specific functions or operations, e.g. selecting or manipulating an object, an image or a displayed text element, setting a parameter value or selecting a range
    • G06F3/04842Selection of displayed objects or displayed text elements
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0487Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser
    • G06F3/0488Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of terminal technology, and in particular, to an interaction method and related equipment.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide an interaction method and related devices. While performing data migration, both the electronic device 100 (that is, the electronic device that receives data) and the electronic device 200 (that is, the electronic device that sends data) can support users to exit data.
  • the migrated user interface can be used to use other functions.
  • the transfer status information of the application's data can also be displayed on the application's icon, and the user can be supported to prioritize/stop transferring the application's data by operating the application's icon. Data, flexible and convenient, improve user experience.
  • embodiments of the present application provide an interaction method applied to a first electronic device.
  • the method includes: the first electronic device establishes a communication connection with a second electronic device; the first electronic device displays a first user interface; A user interface is the desktop of the first electronic device, and the first user interface includes one or more application program icons and one or more logos; wherein the one or more application program icons include an icon of the first application program,
  • One or more identifiers include a first identifier and/or a second identifier, the first identifier is used to indicate the status of the first electronic device receiving the first data, and the second identifier is used to indicate the progress of the first electronic device receiving the first data,
  • the first data is sent by the second electronic device to the first electronic device based on the communication connection, and the first data is data of the first application program.
  • the electronic device can display the transmission status information of the application's data on the application's icon during the data migration process, so as to facilitate the user to know the migration progress of the application's data and provide a user experience.
  • the method further includes: when the status indicated by the first identification is a "waiting to receive" state, and/or the progress indicated by the second identification. If it is 0, the first electronic device detects the user's first operation on the icon of the first application; in response to the first operation, the first electronic device preferentially receives the first data and sets the state indicated by the first identification by The "to be received" state is modified to the "priority receiving" state, and/or the progress indicated by the second identification is modified from "0" to "greater than 0"; the first electronic device sends the first message to the second electronic device, and the first electronic device sends the first message to the second electronic device. A message is used to instruct the second electronic device to send the first data to the first electronic device in priority.
  • the method further includes: when the status indicated by the first identification is a "waiting to receive" state, and/or the progress indicated by the second identification. If it is 0, the first electronic device detects the user's second operation on the icon of the first application; in response to the second operation, the first electronic device displays the first option, and the first option is used to indicate the first electronic device Stop receiving the first data; the first electronic device detects the user's third operation for the first option; in response to the third operation, the first electronic device stops receiving the first data and cancels display of the first logo and the second logo; An electronic device sends a second message to a second electronic device. The second message is used to instruct the second electronic device to stop sending the first data to the first electronic device.
  • the method further includes: the first electronic device detects a fourth operation by the user on the icon of the first application; responding to the fourth operation , the first electronic device displays a first window, the first window includes one or more options, the one or more options include a second option, the second option is used to instruct the first electronic device to continue receiving the first data; the first electronic device The device detects the user's fifth operation for the second option; in response to the fifth operation, the first electronic device displays the first logo and the second logo, and sends a third message to the second electronic device, the third message being used to indicate the The second electronic device continues to send the first data to the first electronic device.
  • the first user interface also includes a first folder, a third identification and/or a fourth identification
  • the first folder includes one or more icons of the second application
  • the third The identification is used to indicate the status of the first electronic device receiving the second data
  • the fourth identification Used to indicate the progress of the first electronic device receiving second data.
  • the second data is sent by the second electronic device to the first electronic device based on the communication connection.
  • the second data is data of one or more second applications.
  • the method further includes: when the status indicated by the third identification is a "waiting to receive” state, and/or the progress indicated by the fourth identification. If it is 0, the first electronic device detects the user's sixth operation on the first folder; in response to the sixth operation, the first electronic device receives the second data with priority, and changes the status indicated by the third identification to "waiting".
  • the "receiving" state is modified to the "priority receiving” state, and/or the progress indicated by the fourth identification is modified from "0" to "greater than 0"; the first electronic device sends a fourth message to the second electronic device, and the fourth message Used to instruct the second electronic device to send the second data to the first electronic device preferentially.
  • the method further includes: when the status indicated by the third identification is a "waiting to receive" state, and/or the progress indicated by the fourth identification. If it is 0, the first electronic device detects the user's seventh operation on the first folder; in response to the seventh operation, the first electronic device displays a third option, and the third option is used to instruct the first electronic device to stop receiving second data; the first electronic device detects the user's eighth operation for the third option; in response to the eighth operation, the first electronic device stops receiving the second data and cancels display of the third logo and the fourth logo; the first electronic device The device sends a fifth message to the second electronic device, where the fifth message is used to instruct the second electronic device to stop sending the second data to the first electronic device.
  • the method further includes: the first electronic device detects the user's ninth operation on the first folder; in response to the ninth operation, An electronic device displays a second window, the second window includes one or more options, the one or more options include a fourth option, and the fourth option is used to instruct the first electronic device to continue receiving the second data; the first electronic device detects to the user's tenth operation for the fourth option; in response to the tenth operation, the first electronic device displays the third logo and the fourth logo, and sends a sixth message to the second electronic device, and the sixth message is used to indicate that the second electronic device The device continues to send the second data to the first electronic device.
  • the first user interface further includes a first prompt, which is used to prompt the user that the first electronic device is receiving data of one or more applications sent by the second electronic device and is approaching Place the first electronic device and the second electronic device.
  • the method before the first electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further includes: the first electronic device displays a second user interface, the second user interface is the interface of the third application program, and the third The application program is used for the first electronic device to receive data of one or more application programs sent by the second electronic device; the first electronic device detects the eleventh operation of the user, and the eleventh operation is used to instruct the first electronic device to display the a user interface.
  • the first electronic device may be the electronic device 100
  • the second electronic device may be the electronic device 200
  • the first user interface may be the desktop of the electronic device 100
  • the icon of the first application may be an object for data migration.
  • An icon of an application program for example, the icon of application 2 shown in FIG. 6A
  • the first data may be data of the first application program
  • the first identification may be an identification indicating a status of receiving the first data (for example, "to be received"). ", "receiving", etc.)
  • the second identification may be an identification indicating the progress of receiving the first data (such as a progress bar)
  • the first operation may be a click operation
  • the first message may be that the electronic device 100 is receiving the first data with priority.
  • the second operation may be a long press operation
  • the first option may be a delete option (for example, option 1041 in Figure 10I or option 1051 in Figure 10J)
  • the third operation may be a click operation.
  • the second message is a message sent by the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 200 after stopping receiving the first data
  • the fourth operation may be a long press operation
  • the first window may be the window 1030 shown in FIG. 10G
  • the second option may be Option 1031
  • the fifth operation may be a click operation
  • the third message may be a message sent by the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 200 after continuing to receive the first data
  • the first folder may be the folder 912 shown in FIG. 9A.
  • the second data may be data of one or more second applications (for example, application 3, application 4) included in the first folder
  • the third identification may be an identification indicating a status of receiving the second data (for example, "to be received” , "receiving", etc.)
  • the fourth identification may be an identification indicating the progress of receiving the second data (such as a progress bar)
  • the sixth operation may be a click operation
  • the fourth message may be that the electronic device 100 is receiving the second data with priority.
  • the seventh operation may be a long press operation
  • the third option may be a delete option (for example, option 1142 in FIG.
  • the eighth operation may be a click operation
  • the fifth message may be an electronic device 100 sends a message to the electronic device 200 after stopping receiving the second data
  • the ninth operation may be a long press operation
  • the second window may be the window 1130 shown in Figure 11F
  • the fourth option may be option 1132
  • the tenth operation may is a click operation
  • the sixth message may be a message sent by the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 200 after continuing to receive the second data
  • the first prompt may be the prompt bar 511 shown in Figure 5A
  • the second user interface may be as shown in Figure 4F
  • the third application can be a mobile phone cloning application
  • the eleventh operation can be an operation of returning to the desktop.
  • embodiments of the present application provide an interaction method applied to a second electronic device.
  • the method includes: the second electronic device establishes a communication connection with the first electronic device; the second electronic device displays the first user interface; A user interface is the desktop of the second electronic device, and the first user interface includes one or more application program icons and one or more logos; wherein the one or more application program icons include an icon of the first application program,
  • One or more identifiers include a first identifier and/or a second identifier, and the first identifier is used to instruct the second electronic device to send
  • the status of the first data the second identification is used to indicate the progress of the second electronic device sending the first data
  • the first data is sent by the second electronic device to the first electronic device based on the communication connection
  • the first data is the first application program The data.
  • the method further includes: when the status indicated by the first identification is a "to be sent” state, and/or the progress indicated by the second identification. If it is 0, the second electronic device detects the user's first operation on the icon of the first application; in response to the first operation, the second electronic device sends the first data with priority, and sets the status indicated by the first identification by The "to be sent" state is modified to the "priority sending” state, and/or the progress indicated by the second identification is modified from "0" to "greater than 0"; the second electronic device sends the first message to the first electronic device, and the second electronic device sends the first message to the first electronic device.
  • a message is used to instruct the first electronic device to preferentially receive the first data sent by the second electronic device.
  • the method further includes: when the status indicated by the first identification is a "to be sent" state, and/or the progress indicated by the second identification. If it is 0, the second electronic device detects the user's second operation on the icon of the first application; in response to the second operation, the second electronic device displays the first option, and the first option is used to indicate the second electronic device Stop sending the first data; the first electronic device detects the user's third operation for the first option; in response to the third operation, the second electronic device stops sending the first data and cancels display of the first logo and the second logo; The second electronic device sends a second message to the first electronic device, and the second message is used to instruct the first electronic device to stop receiving the first data sent by the second electronic device.
  • the method further includes: the second electronic device detects a fourth operation by the user on the icon of the first application; responding to the fourth operation , the second electronic device displays a first window, the first window includes one or more options, the one or more options include a second option, the second option is used to instruct the second electronic device to continue sending the first data; the first electronic device The device detects the user's fifth operation for the second option; in response to the fifth operation, the second electronic device displays the first logo and the second logo, and sends a third message to the first electronic device, the third message being used to indicate the An electronic device continues to receive the first data sent by the second electronic device.
  • the first user interface also includes a first folder, a third identification and/or a fourth identification
  • the first folder includes one or more icons of the second application
  • the third The identification is used to indicate the status of the first electronic device receiving the second data
  • the fourth identification is used to indicate the progress of the first electronic device receiving the second data.
  • the second data is sent by the second electronic device to the first electronic device based on the communication connection.
  • the second data is data of one or more second applications.
  • the method further includes: when the status indicated by the third identification is a "to be sent" state, and/or the progress indicated by the fourth identification. If it is 0, the first electronic device detects the sixth operation of the user on the first folder; in response to the sixth operation, the second electronic device sends the second data with priority, and changes the status indicated by the third identification to "waiting".
  • the receiving" state is modified to the "priority receiving” state, and/or the progress indicated by the fourth identification is modified from "0" to "greater than 0"; the second electronic device sends a fourth message to the first electronic device, and the fourth message Used to instruct the first electronic device to preferentially receive the second data sent by the second electronic device.
  • the method further includes: when the status indicated by the third identification is a "waiting to receive" state, and/or the progress indicated by the fourth identification. If it is 0, the first electronic device detects the user's seventh operation on the first folder; in response to the seventh operation, the first electronic device displays a third option, and the third option is used to instruct the second electronic device to stop sending.
  • the first electronic device detects the user's eighth operation for the third option; in response to the eighth operation, the first electronic device stops sending the second data and cancels the display of the third logo and the fourth logo; the second electronic device The device sends a fifth message to the first electronic device, where the fifth message is used to instruct the first electronic device to stop receiving the second data sent by the second electronic device.
  • the method further includes: the first electronic device detects the user's ninth operation on the first folder; in response to the ninth operation, An electronic device displays a second window, the second window includes one or more options, the one or more options include a fourth option, and the fourth option is used to instruct the second electronic device to continue sending the second data; the first electronic device detects to the user's tenth operation for the fourth option; in response to the tenth operation, the second electronic device displays the third logo and the fourth logo, and sends a sixth message to the first electronic device, the sixth message is used to indicate that the first electronic device The device continues to receive the second data sent by the second electronic device.
  • the first user interface also includes a first prompt, which is used to prompt the user that the second electronic device is sending data of one or more applications to the first electronic device and is placed close to the first electronic device.
  • first electronic device and second electronic device are used to prompt the user that the second electronic device is sending data of one or more applications to the first electronic device and is placed close to the first electronic device.
  • the method before the second electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further includes: the second electronic device displays a second user interface, and the second user interface is the interface of the third application program, and the third The application program is used for the second electronic device to send data of one or more application programs to the second electronic device; the second electronic device detects the eleventh operation of the user, and the eleventh operation is used to instruct the second electronic device to display the first user interface.
  • the second user interface includes options for one or more applications, and the options for the one or more applications are arranged in a first order, where the first order is preset by the system, or, A sequence is a system based on the user's use of one or more applications The frequency is set, or the first order is manually set by the user; the first order is used to indicate the order in which the second electronic device sends data of one or more applications to the first electronic device.
  • the method further includes: the second electronic device cancels display of the first logo and the second logo, and displays a fifth logo in the first user interface.
  • the fifth identification is used to indicate that the second electronic device has completed sending the first data, and the first electronic device has not completed receiving the first data.
  • the method further includes: the second electronic device displays a sixth identification in the first user interface, and the sixth identification is The first application program is instructed to generate third data; the second electronic device detects the user's twelfth operation; and in response to the twelfth operation, the second electronic device sends the third data to the first electronic device.
  • the first electronic device may be the electronic device 100
  • the second electronic device may be the electronic device 200
  • the first user interface may be the desktop of the electronic device 200
  • the icon of the first application may be a program for data migration.
  • An icon of an application program for example, the icon of application 2 shown in FIG. 6C
  • the first data may be data of the first application program
  • the first identification may be an identification indicating a status of sending the first data (for example, "to be sent"). ", "Sending", etc.)
  • the second identification may be an identification indicating the progress of sending the first data (such as a progress bar)
  • the first operation may be a click operation
  • the first message may be that the electronic device 200 is sending the first data in priority.
  • the second operation may be a long press operation
  • the first option may be a delete option (for example, option 1011 in FIG. 10B or option 1021 in FIG. 10C)
  • the third operation may be a click operation.
  • the second message is a message sent by the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 100 after stopping sending the first data
  • the fourth operation may be a long press operation
  • the first window may be the window 1060 shown in FIG. 10K
  • the second option may be Option 1061
  • the fifth operation may be a click operation
  • the third message may be a message sent by the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 100 after continuing to send the first data
  • the first folder may be the folder 912 shown in FIG. 9C.
  • the second data may be data of one or more second applications (for example, application 3, application 4) included in the first folder
  • the third identification may be an identification indicating a status of sending the second data (for example, "to be sent” , "Sending”, etc.)
  • the fourth identification may be an identification indicating the progress of sending the second data (such as a progress bar)
  • the sixth operation may be a click operation
  • the fourth message may be that the electronic device 200 is sending the second data with priority.
  • the seventh operation may be a long press operation
  • the third option may be a delete option (for example, option 1122 in FIG.
  • the eighth operation may be a click operation
  • the fifth message may be an electronic device 200 is a message sent to the electronic device 100 after stopping sending the second data
  • the ninth operation may be a long press operation
  • the second window may be the window 1150 shown in Figure 11I
  • the fourth option may be option 1151
  • the tenth operation may is a click operation
  • the sixth message may be a message sent by the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 100 after continuing to send the second data
  • the first prompt may be the prompt bar 511 shown in FIG.
  • the user interface may be the interface shown in Figure 4E
  • the third application may be a mobile phone cloning application
  • the eleventh operation may be an operation of returning to the desktop
  • the first order may be the arrangement order of the application icons shown in Figure 4E
  • the fifth identification may be the identification 1211 shown in Figure 12A
  • the sixth identification may be the identification 1212 shown in Figure 12C
  • the third data may be new data generated after the user uses the application program
  • the twelfth operation may be to indicate electronic
  • the device 200 transmits the operation of the third data to the electronic device 100 (for example, the operation of long pressing the icon of the application 2 shown in FIG. 12B and the operation of clicking the option 1221).
  • embodiments of the present application provide an electronic device, which includes one or more processors and one or more memories; wherein the one or more memories and the one or more processors Coupled, the one or more memories are used to store computer program codes, the computer program codes include computer instructions, and when the one or more processors execute the computer instructions, the electronic device performs the above-mentioned first step.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a computer storage medium that stores a computer program.
  • the computer program includes program instructions.
  • the electronic device causes the electronic device to The method described in any possible implementation manner of the first aspect or the second aspect is executed.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product.
  • the computer program product When the computer program product is run on a computer, it causes the computer to execute the method described in any of the possible implementations of the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • 1A-1F are a set of schematic diagrams of user interfaces displayed by different electronic devices during the data migration process provided by embodiments of the present application;
  • Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 3A-3H are a set of user interface schematic diagrams involved in the process of establishing a communication connection between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • Figures 4A to 4F are schematic diagrams of a set of user interfaces involved in the process of users selecting data to be migrated and manually setting the migration sequence of data provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • 5A-5H are a set of user interface schematic diagrams involved in the process of displaying global progress prompt information by the electronic device 100 provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • Figures 6A-6D are a set of user interfaces involved in the process of the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 provided by the embodiment of the present application displaying the migration progress prompt information of each application's data in real time at the "independent application granularity" schematic diagram;
  • 8A to 8D are a set of user interface schematic diagrams involved in the process of preferentially migrating application data and displaying relevant prompt information at the "independent application granularity" of the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIGS. 9A to 9D illustrate a process involved in the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 provided by the embodiment of the present application to preferentially migrate data of applications included in the folder at a "folder granularity" and display relevant prompt information.
  • 10A to 10K are a set of user interface schematic diagrams involved in the process of migrating data of an application program at the "independent application granularity" provided by the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 according to the embodiment of the present application;
  • 11A-11I are a set of user interface schematic diagrams involved in the process of stopping the migration of data of applications included in the folder at the "folder granularity" provided by the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • Figures 12A to 12F illustrate the situation provided by the embodiment of the present application when "the data of a certain application program on the electronic device 200 has been sent to the electronic device 100, but the data of the application program has not been cloned on the electronic device 100."
  • a set of user interface schematic diagrams involved in the process of electronic device 200 displaying relevant prompt information
  • Figure 13 is a schematic diagram of the software architecture of an electronic device 100 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 100 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • an embodiment means that a particular feature, structure or characteristic described in connection with the embodiment may be included in at least one embodiment of the application.
  • the appearances of this phrase in various places in the specification are not necessarily all referring to the same embodiment, nor are separate or alternative embodiments mutually exclusive of other embodiments. It will be explicitly and implicitly understood by those skilled in the art that the embodiments described herein may be combined with other embodiments.
  • GUI graphical user interface
  • Application (APP, APP, can be referred to as application) backup technology is used to generate a copy of the application's data (such as the application's configuration file, user data, etc.), which can be used to restore the application when the user needs it.
  • the data can also be used to import the data of the application from one electronic device to another electronic device for use. If the user uses the application while the electronic device is generating a copy of the application, it may cause the data backup to fail.
  • another electronic device needs to load these data, the user You need to wait for all data to be imported and restored before you can use the electronic device normally, which results in a poor user experience.
  • electronic devices produced by different device manufacturers may display different data migration user interfaces.
  • FIGS. 1A and 1B exemplarily illustrate a set of user interfaces of the electronic device produced by device manufacturer 1 during the data migration process.
  • the user interface shown in Figure 1A is a user interface displayed when the electronic device 200 (ie, the electronic device that sends data) sends data during the data migration process. It can be seen that a prompt is displayed in the user interface. Information about the user not to exit the user interface (e.g. "Do not leave this page").
  • the user interface shown exemplarily in FIG. 1B is a user interface displayed when the electronic device 100 (ie, the electronic device that receives data) receives data during the data migration process. It can be seen that in the user interface Relevant information that prompts the user not to exit the user interface (such as "Do not leave this page") is also displayed.
  • the electronic device produced by equipment manufacturer 1 will display relevant information on the user interface of the data migration to prompt the user not to exit the user interface.
  • FIGS. 1C to 1D exemplarily illustrate a set of user interfaces in the data migration process of the electronic device produced by device manufacturer 2.
  • the user interface illustrated in FIG. 1C is a user interface displayed by the electronic device 200 (ie, the electronic device that sends data) when preparing data during the data migration process. If the user exits this user interface, the electronic device 200 Data preparation will stop, that is, the data migration task will not continue.
  • the user interface shown exemplarily in FIG. 1D is a user interface displayed when the electronic device 100 (ie, the electronic device receiving data) is waiting for the other party to transmit data during the data migration process. If the user exits this user interface , or if the user clicks the "stop" option shown in Figure 1D, the electronic device 100 will stop waiting for the other party to transmit data, that is, it will not continue the data migration task.
  • FIGS. 1E to 1F exemplarily illustrate a set of user interfaces in the data migration process of the electronic device produced by device manufacturer 3.
  • the user interface illustrated in Figure 1E is a user interface displayed when the electronic device 200 (ie, the electronic device that sends data) sends data during the data migration process. If the user exits this user interface, or the user clicks With the “Cancel” option shown in FIG. 1E , the electronic device 200 will stop sending data, that is, it will not continue the data migration task.
  • the user interface exemplarily shown in FIG. 1F is a user interface displayed when the electronic device 100 (ie, the electronic device that receives data) receives data during the data migration process. If the user exits this user interface, or , the user clicks the "Cancel" option shown in Figure 1F, then the electronic device 100 will stop receiving data, that is, it will not continue the data migration task.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide an interaction method and related devices. While performing data migration, both the electronic device 100 (that is, the electronic device that receives data) and the electronic device 200 (that is, the electronic device that sends data) can support users to exit data.
  • the migrated user interface is used to use other functions.
  • the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 can also display the transmission status information of the application data (such as "sending/receiving", "pending” through the application icon on the desktop). "Sending/to be received", the progress of data sending/receiving, etc.), and can support users to prioritize transmission/stop transmission of the application's data by operating the application's icon, which is flexible and convenient, and improves user experience.
  • Figure 2 schematically shows a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system may include: multiple electronic devices (also called terminal devices).
  • the plurality of electronic devices may include: electronic device 100 and electronic device 200 .
  • the number of electronic devices is not limited.
  • the multiple electronic devices included in the communication system are all smart terminal devices and can be of various types.
  • the embodiments of this application do not limit the specific types of the multiple electronic devices.
  • the plurality of electronic devices may include mobile phones, but may also include tablet computers, desktop computers, laptop computers, handheld computers, notebook computers, smart screens, artificial intelligence (Artificial Intelligence, AI) devices, car machines, etc.
  • AI Artificial Intelligence
  • the electronic device 100 may be an electronic device that receives data (also may be called a destination electronic device, or a new device, or a recipient), and the electronic device 200 may be an electronic device that sends data (may also be called a source electronic device). , or, old device, or, sender).
  • Multiple electronic devices in the communication system can log in to the same account.
  • multiple electronic devices can log in to the same Huawei account.
  • the account number can be a mobile phone number, email address, customized username, etc.
  • multiple electronic devices in the communication system can also be connected and communicate in any of the following ways: wired connection, wireless connection such as Bluetooth (BT) connection, wireless local area networks (WLAN) such as Wireless fidelity point to point (Wi-Fi P2P) connection, near field communication (NFC) connection, infrared technology (infrared, IR) connection, etc., are not limited in the embodiments of this application .
  • wireless connection such as Bluetooth (BT) connection
  • WLAN wireless local area networks
  • Wi-Fi P2P Wireless fidelity point to point
  • NFC near field communication
  • infrared technology infrared, IR
  • Multiple electronic devices in the communication system can be configured with different software operating systems (OperatingSystem, OS), including but not limited to etc. in, For Huawei’s Hongmeng system.
  • Multiple electronic devices can all be configured with the same software operating system, for example
  • a communication connection needs to be established between the electronic device 100 (that is, the electronic device that receives data) and the electronic device 200 (that is, the electronic device that sends data).
  • the electronic device 200 can send data to the electronic device 100 based on the communication connection, and the electronic device 100 can receive the data sent by the electronic device 200 based on the communication connection, thereby completing data migration.
  • a possible implementation method for establishing a communication connection between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 will be introduced below with reference to FIGS. 3A-3H.
  • 3A-3H exemplarily illustrate a series of user interfaces involved in the process of establishing a communication connection between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200.
  • the electronic device 100 can create a WLAN to support the electronic device 200 to connect to the WLAN, so that the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 establish a communication connection.
  • the electronic device 100 can display a user interface 310 , which can include options 311 and 312 .
  • option 311 can be used by the user to select the electronic device 100 as a new device (ie, an electronic device that receives data), and option 312 can be used by the user to select the electronic device 100 as an old device (ie, an electronic device that sends data).
  • the electronic device 100 may enter the user interface 310 through the "Mobile Clone” application, or may enter the user interface 310 through the "Settings” application, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 is a new device (that is, an electronic device that receives data).
  • the electronic device 100 may detect a user's operation (eg, a click operation) on option 311 , and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 320 exemplarily shown in FIG. 3B .
  • a user's operation eg, a click operation
  • the user interface 320 may include options 321 , 322 , and 323 .
  • the user interface 320 may be used by the user to select the type of legacy device (ie, the electronic device that sends the data).
  • option 321 can be used by the user to select an electronic device whose old device type is "Huawei”
  • option 322 can be used by the user to select an electronic device whose old device type is "other Android”
  • option 323 can be used by the user to select an electronic device whose old device type is "Other Android”.
  • “iPhone/iPad” electronic device can be used by the user to select an electronic device whose old device type is "Huawei”
  • option 322 can be used by the user to select an electronic device whose old device type is "other Android”
  • option 323 can be used by the user to select an electronic device whose old device type is "Other Android”.
  • the electronic device 100 can detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 321 , and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 can display the user's information as exemplarily shown in FIG. 3C Interface 330.
  • the user's operation such as a click operation
  • a QR code 331 may be included in the user interface 330.
  • the QR code 331 is a QR code corresponding to the WLAN created by the electronic device 100, which can be used by the user to scan through the electronic device 200, thereby establishing a communication connection between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200.
  • the user interface 330 may also include the account (for example, XXXXXXXXXXXCloudClone) and password (for example, XXXXXXXX) corresponding to the WLAN created by the electronic device 100, which may be used to support the user to manually connect to the WLAN through the electronic device 200.
  • account for example, XXXXXXXXXXCloudClone
  • password for example, XXXXXXXX
  • the electronic device 200 can scan the QR code corresponding to the WLAN. After the scanning and recognition are successful, the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 establish a communication connection.
  • the electronic device 200 can display a user interface 340 , which can include options 341 and 342 .
  • option 341 can be used by the user to select the electronic device 200 as a new device (ie, an electronic device that receives data), and option 342 can be used by the user to select the electronic device 200 as an old device (ie, an electronic device that sends data).
  • the electronic device 200 may enter the user interface 340 through the "Mobile Clone” application, or may enter the user interface 340 through the "Settings” application, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the electronic device 200 is a new device (that is, an electronic device that sends data).
  • the electronic device 200 may detect a user's operation (eg, a click operation) on option 342 , and in response to the operation, the electronic device 200 may display the user interface 350 exemplarily shown in FIG. 3E .
  • a user's operation eg, a click operation
  • the user interface 350 is a code scanning interface, which can be used to support the user to scan the QR code corresponding to the WLAN created by the electronic device 100 (such as the QR code 331 shown in Figure 3C).
  • the electronic device 200 can display the image of the above QR code in the code scanning box shown as an example in FIG. 3F .
  • the electronic device 200 can display the user interface 360 as exemplarily shown in FIG. 3G .
  • the user interface 360 can be used to prompt that the electronic device 200 is establishing a connection with a new device (ie, the electronic device 200 ). Communication connection.
  • the electronic device 200 may display a user interface for the user to select migration data (for example, the user interface illustrated in FIG. 4A below).
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 370 exemplarily shown in FIG. 3H , which may be used to prompt the user that the electronic device 100 successfully establishes a communication connection with the old device (ie, the electronic device 200 ), and may be used to prompt the user that the communication connection can be successfully established. Select the data that needs to be migrated on the old device.
  • the electronic device 200 can display a user interface for the user to select data to be migrated, and the user can manually select data that needs to be migrated in the user interface.
  • users can also manually set the data migration order (also called cloning order) in this user interface.
  • Figures 4A to 4F exemplarily illustrate a series of user interfaces involved in the process of the user selecting data that needs to be migrated and manually setting the migration sequence of the data.
  • the electronic device 200 can display the user interface 410 exemplarily shown in Figure 4A.
  • the user interface can be a user interface for the user to select data that needs to be migrated. .
  • the user interface 410 may include options corresponding to the data of one or more applications (such as option 412, option 413, option 414, option 415, option 416, option 417, etc.), which may be used by the user to select which/which ones need to be migrated.
  • applications such as option 412, option 413, option 414, option 415, option 416, option 417, etc.
  • option 412 is the option corresponding to the data of the "Contacts” application
  • option 413 is the option corresponding to the data of the "Message” application
  • option 414 is the option corresponding to the data of the "Call Records” application
  • option 415 is "
  • the option 416 is the option corresponding to the data of the "Schedule” application
  • the option 416 is the option corresponding to the data of the "Gallery” application
  • the option 417 is the option corresponding to the data of the "Recording" application.
  • option 417 is grayed out, that is, in an unselectable state. That is to say, if the new device does not support importing the data of a certain application, the user cannot select the data of the application. to perform data migration. Optionally, option 417 may not be displayed. That is to say, if the new device does not support importing data of a certain application program, the electronic device 200 may not display options corresponding to the data of the application program.
  • the user interface 410 may also include an option 411 (ie, a "select all” option), which can be used by the user to select data of all applications that can be migrated with one click.
  • an option 411 ie, a "select all” option
  • the user interface 410 may also include an option 418 (ie, a "start migration” option), which may be used by the user to start data migration after selecting the data that needs to be migrated. It can be seen that when the user does not start to select the data that needs to be migrated, option 418 is grayed out, that is, it is in an unselectable state.
  • option 418 ie, a "start migration” option
  • the electronic device 200 can also support the user to view or select more options corresponding to the data of the application program through an upward sliding operation.
  • the electronic device 200 can support the user to select the data of all applications that can be migrated with one click by operating option 411, or can also support the user to select the data that needs to be migrated by operating the options corresponding to the data of each application one by one.
  • Application data Taking the user's one-click operation of option 411 to select data of all applications that can be migrated as an example, the electronic device 200 can detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 411, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 200 can select Data for all applications that can be migrated.
  • a selection mark (such as a " ⁇ " mark) is displayed in the selection box corresponding to the data of all applications that can be migrated, which is used to prompt the user that the selection has been completed and that all the data can be migrated. Migrated application data. Since the selection of data to be migrated has been completed, the "Start Migration" option has also changed from "unselectable status" to "optional status".
  • the arrangement order of the options corresponding to the data of one or more applications displayed by the electronic device 200 can represent the migration order of the application data. If the arrangement position is higher, the data of the application program will be migrated first. .
  • the arrangement order may be an arrangement order preset by the system of the electronic device 200 , or may be an arrangement order set by the electronic device 200 by learning the user's usage habits. For example, the electronic device 200 can count the frequency with which users use each application in a recent period of time, and then arrange the options corresponding to the data of each application according to the user's frequency of use. The higher the frequency of use, the higher the ranking order, and the migration order. It's also closer to the front. In this way, the data of applications that users use more frequently can be migrated first, so that the data of this application can be migrated earlier, so that users can use the application earlier and improve the user experience.
  • the electronic device 200 can also support the user to adjust the order of options corresponding to the data of the one or more applications through manual settings, thereby changing the migration order of the data of the one or more applications.
  • the user can be supported to adjust the order of options corresponding to the data of one or more of the above applications through dragging operations.
  • the user can adjust the options corresponding to the data of the "Gallery” application to the front (that is, the sort order is at the first).
  • the electronic device 200 may detect the user's operation on the option corresponding to the data of the "Gallery” application (for example, long press and drag upward the option corresponding to the data of the "Gallery” application to the "Contacts” application).
  • the operation before the option corresponding to the data in response to the operation, the electronic device 200 can display the user interface shown in FIG. 4C. It can be seen that in the user interface, the option corresponding to the data of the "Gallery” application is It has been adjusted to the front so that the data of the "Gallery” application can be migrated first after the data migration starts.
  • FIG. 4B describes the process of the user adjusting the order of options corresponding to the data of the application program forward.
  • the electronic device 200 can also support the user to adjust the order of options corresponding to the data of the application program backward.
  • the user can adjust the options corresponding to the data of the "Gallery” application to the back of the options corresponding to the data of the "Contacts” application.
  • the electronic device 200 can detect the user's operation on the option corresponding to the data of the "Gallery” application (for example, long press and drag downward the option corresponding to the data of the "Gallery” application to " The operation after the option corresponding to the data of the "Contacts” application), in response to this operation, the electronic device 200 can display the user interface shown in FIG. 4D.
  • the electronic device 200 can detect the user's operation on the option corresponding to the data of the "Gallery” application (for example, long press and drag downward the option corresponding to the data of the "Gallery” application to " The operation after the option corresponding to the data of the "Contacts” application), in response to this operation, the electronic device 200 can display the user interface shown in FIG. 4D.
  • data migration can begin.
  • the electronic device 200 can detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on the "Start Migration" option shown in FIG. 4D, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 200 can start data migration (ie, package the data, After the packaging is completed, it is sent to the electronic device 100).
  • the electronic device 200 may start to display the user interface of the data sending process, and the electronic device 100 may start to display the user interface of the data receiving process.
  • FIG. 4E exemplarily shows a user interface during the process of data transmission by the electronic device 200 (that is, after the user triggers the electronic device 200 to perform data migration).
  • the user interface may include some relevant information about the data sending process performed by the electronic device 200, such as the total amount of data sent (such as “5MB sent”), the percentage of data sent (such as “20%”), the number of data sent. rate (such as "130MB/second”), the remaining time to complete the data sending (such as "15 minutes”), the data sending status of each application (such as "completed", “sending", “waiting to send”) ,etc.
  • FIG. 4F exemplarily shows a user interface during the data receiving process of the electronic device 100 (that is, after the user triggers the electronic device 200 to perform data migration).
  • the user interface may include some relevant information about the data receiving process performed by the electronic device 100, such as the total amount of data received (such as “5MB received”), the percentage of data received (such as “20%”), the number of data received. rate (such as "130MB/second”), the remaining time to complete data reception (such as "15 minutes”), the data reception status of each application (such as "completed", “receiving", “waiting to receive”) ,etc.
  • both the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 can support the user from data transmission.
  • the interface (such as the user interface schematically shown in FIG. 4E and FIG. 4F ) is switched out (for example, switched to the desktop) to use other functions of the electronic device without affecting the user's use.
  • both the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 can display global progress prompt information.
  • a possible implementation method for the electronic device 100 to display global progress prompt information will be introduced below with reference to FIGS. 5A to 5H .
  • 5A-5H exemplarily illustrate a series of user interfaces involved in the process of the electronic device 100 displaying global progress prompt information.
  • the user interface 510 shown in FIG. The interface 510 may include a prompt bar 511, which may display relevant prompt information (such as "cloning, please keep the device close") to prompt the user that the electronic device is undergoing data migration (which may also be called data cloning). ), users are asked to keep their devices close to maintain higher signal strength for faster data migration tasks.
  • relevant prompt information such as "cloning, please keep the device close”
  • data migration which may also be called data cloning
  • the electronic device 100 can automatically adjust the visibility or conspicuousness of the prompt bar 511 based on the distance between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 or the signal strength of the communication connection.
  • the electronic device 100 can adjust the prompt bar 511 to be larger than the figure. 5A, a lighter color and a higher transparency prompt bar (such as the faded color and higher transparency prompt bar shown in FIG. 5B), or the size of the prompt bar 511 can be adjusted to be larger than the size in FIG. 5A.
  • a smaller prompt bar can reduce the obstruction of the desktop content by the prompt bar.
  • the electronic device 100 may support a hidden display function of the prompt bar.
  • an option 512 may be displayed on the prompt bar 511 , and the option 512 may be used to hide and display the prompt bar (ie, cancel the display of the prompt bar).
  • the electronic device 100 may detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 512, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may hide and display the prompt bar 511. In this way, after hiding and displaying the prompt bar 511, the desktop content will not be blocked, and at the same time, the user is given the right to choose whether to display the prompt bar 511.
  • the electronic device 100 can automatically The prompt bar 511 is redisplayed to prompt the user to place the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 close to each other to maintain higher signal strength in order to successfully complete the data migration task.
  • the prompt bar 511 may be displayed on a user interface other than the desktop.
  • the prompt bar 511 may be displayed on a user interface corresponding to the notification bar as exemplarily shown in FIG. 5D .
  • the electronic device 100 may also support a hidden display function of the prompt bar.
  • the electronic device 100 can detect the user's operation (such as a left sliding operation) on the prompt bar 511 , and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 can display the option 513 exemplarily shown in FIG. 5E .
  • the option 513 Can be used to hide the display prompt bar 511.
  • the electronic device 100 may detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 513, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may hide and display the prompt bar 511. In this way, the user is given the right to choose, allowing the user to independently choose whether to display the prompt bar 511.
  • the electronic device 100 can automatically redisplay the prompt bar 511 to prompt the user to place the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 close to each other to maintain higher signal strength in order to successfully complete the data migration task.
  • the electronic device 100 may also display relevant prompt information to prompt the user that the data migration is completed.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a prompt bar 514 , and the prompt bar 514 may display relevant prompt information (such as “Clone Complete”) to prompt the user that the data migration has been completed. .
  • relevant prompt information such as “Clone Complete”
  • the prompt bar 514 may also display an option 515, and the option 515 may be used to hide and display the prompt bar 514.
  • the electronic device 100 may detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 515, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may hide and display the prompt bar 514. In this way, the user is given the right to choose, allowing the user to independently choose whether to display the prompt bar 514.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the prompt bar 514 for a preset time period (for example, “10s”). After the preset time period, the electronic device 100 may automatically hide the display prompt bar 514 . In this way, the user does not need to manually operate to hide the display prompt bar 514, simplifying the user operation.
  • a preset time period for example, “10s”.
  • the prompt bar 514 may also display a countdown of the preset duration. After the countdown ends, the electronic device 100 may automatically hide and display the prompt bar 514 .
  • the prompt bar 514 may be displayed on a user interface other than the desktop.
  • the prompt bar 514 may be displayed on a user interface corresponding to the notification bar as exemplarily shown in FIG. 5G .
  • the electronic device 100 may also support a hidden display function of the prompt bar.
  • the electronic device 100 can detect the user's operation (such as a left sliding operation) on the prompt bar 514 , and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 can display the option 516 exemplarily shown in FIG. 5H .
  • the option 516 Can be used to hide the display prompt bar 514.
  • the electronic device 100 may detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 516, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may hide and display the prompt bar 514. In this way, the user is given the right to choose, allowing the user to independently choose whether to display the prompt bar 514.
  • FIGS. 5A to 5H only take the electronic device 100 as an example to illustrate the process of the electronic device displaying the global progress prompt information. It is easy to understand that the process of the electronic device 200 displaying the global progress prompt information is similar to the electronic device 100 . You can refer to the above The relevant contents of Figure 5A to Figure 5H will not be described again here.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the display form (such as shape, size, color, transparency, display position, text on the prompt bar, etc.) of the above prompt bar 511 and prompt bar 514.
  • the text on the prompt bar 511 is "Cloning, please keep the device close" as an example. It is not limited to this, and it can also be other related text/symbols used to prompt the user that the electronic device is undergoing data migration. , and/or, relevant text/symbols used to prompt the user to keep two devices placed close to each other.
  • the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 can not only display global progress prompt information, but also display the migration progress of the application data in real time. (Can also be called cloning progress) prompt information.
  • the possible implementation methods for the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 to display the migration progress prompt information of the application data in real time may include but are not limited to the following two methods: one is that the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 display the migration progress prompt information of the application program in real time. The other is that the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 display the data of the applications included in the folder in real time at the "granularity of the folder".
  • the overall migration progress prompt information is introduced in detail below:
  • 6A to 6D exemplarily illustrate a series of user interfaces involved in the process of the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 displaying the migration progress prompt information of each application's data in real time at the "independent application granularity".
  • 6A-6B are a set of user interfaces involved in the process of the electronic device 100 displaying the migration progress prompt information of the data of each application program in real time at the "independent application granularity”.
  • the user interface 610 illustrated in FIG. 6A may be a user interface provided by a “desktop” application of the electronic device 100 .
  • the user interface may include one or more application icons (such as icon 611, icon 612, etc.).
  • the application corresponding to the one or more application icons may be that the electronic device 200 is migrating data to the electronic device 100. s application.
  • the icons of the one or more application programs mentioned above may be sent by the electronic device 200 in priority after the data migration starts, so that the electronic device 100 can display them.
  • the electronic device 100 can display the migration progress prompt information of the data of one or more application programs in real time in the user interface 610 shown in FIG. 6A , for example, the electronic device 100
  • the progress bar of the application receiving the data may be displayed on the application's icon; for another example, the status of the application receiving the data (such as "receiving", "to be received") may also be displayed below the application's icon.
  • a progress bar can be displayed on the icon of Application 1 611a.
  • the progress bar 611a can be used to indicate the progress of the application 1 receiving data. It can be seen from the progress bar 611a that the application 1 has received a part of the data sent from the electronic device 200.
  • a prompt bar 611b may also be displayed, and the prompt bar 611b may be used to prompt the user that the application 1 is receiving data and is in an unavailable state (that is, the user cannot currently use the application 1).
  • a progress bar 612a may be displayed on the icon of Application 2.
  • the progress bar 612a may be used to indicate the progress of Application 2 receiving data. It can be seen from the progress bar 612a that Application 2 has not yet received data from the electronic device. 200.
  • a prompt bar 612b may be displayed below the icon of Application 2. The prompt bar 612b may be used to prompt the user that Application 2 is waiting to receive data and is in an unavailable state (that is, the user cannot currently use the Application 2).
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the display form (such as shape, color, transparency, etc.) of the above-mentioned progress bar.
  • it can be a fan shape as shown in Figure 6A, or it can be as shown in Figure 6B Ring shape (this reduces occlusion of the app's icon), etc.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the display form (such as display position, shape, etc.) of the above prompt bar. For example, it may be displayed below the icon of the application program shown in FIG. 6A , or may be displayed in other positions of the icon of the application program.
  • the percentage of received data can also be displayed on the application's icon. For example, an application in the "Receiving" state has received 40% of the data. data, then “40%” can be displayed on the application's icon; for another example, if an application in the "pending" state has not received data, then "0%” can be displayed on the application's icon;
  • 6C to 6D are a set of user interfaces involved in the process of the electronic device 200 displaying the migration progress prompt information of the data of each application program in real time at the "independent application granularity”.
  • the user interface 620 illustrated in FIG. 6C may be a user interface provided by a “desktop” application of the electronic device 200 .
  • the user interface may include one or more application icons (such as icon 621, icon 622, etc.).
  • the application corresponding to the one or more application icons may be that the electronic device 200 is migrating data to the electronic device 100. s application.
  • the electronic device 200 can display the migration progress prompt information of the data of one or more application programs in real time in the user interface 620 shown in FIG. 6C , for example, the electronic device 200 A progress bar for sending data by the application may be displayed on the icon of the application; for another example, the status of data being sent by the application (for example, "sending", "to be sent”) may also be displayed below the icon of the application.
  • a progress bar 622a is displayed on the icon of Application 2.
  • the progress bar 622a can be used to indicate the progress of Application 2 sending data. From the progress bar 622a, it can be seen that Application 2 has not yet sent data to the electronic device 100.
  • a prompt bar 622b is also displayed below the icon of Application 2.
  • the prompt bar 612b can be used to prompt the user that Application 2 is waiting to send data and is in an unavailable state (that is, the user cannot currently use Application 2) .
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the display form (such as shape, color, transparency, etc.) of the above-mentioned progress bar.
  • it can be a fan shape as shown in Figure 6C, or it can be as shown in Figure 6D Ring shape (this reduces occlusion of the app's icon), etc.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the display form (such as display position, shape, etc.) of the above prompt bar. For example, it may be displayed below the application icon shown in FIG. 6C , or may be displayed at other positions of the application icon.
  • the percentage of data sent can also be displayed on the application's icon. For example, an application in the "Sending” state has sent 40% of the data. data, then "40%” can be displayed on the application's icon; for another example, if the application in the "pending" state has not sent data, then "0%” can be displayed on the application's icon;
  • 7A to 7H exemplarily illustrate a series of processes involved in the process in which the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 display in real time the overall migration progress prompt information of the data of the application program included in the folder at the "granularity of the folder". user interface.
  • 7A-7D are a set of user interfaces involved in the process of the electronic device 100 displaying in real time the overall migration progress prompt information of the data of the application program included in the folder at the "granularity of the folder".
  • the user interface 710 illustrated in FIG. 7A may be a user interface provided by a “desktop” application of the electronic device 100 .
  • the user interface may include one or more folders (eg, folder 711 , etc.), and the applications included in the one or more folders may be applications that the electronic device 200 is migrating data to the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 can use "folder granularity" in the user interface 710 shown in FIG. 7A
  • the overall migration progress prompt information of the data of the application program included in the folder is displayed in real time.
  • the electronic device 100 can display a progress bar on the folder for the application program included in the folder to receive data; for another example, the electronic device 100 can also display on the folder a progress bar of the application program included in the folder.
  • the status of data received by applications included in the folder is displayed on the folder (for example, "receiving", "to be received”).
  • application 1 and application 2 are also taken as an example.
  • Application 1 and application 2 are both applications in the folder 711 .
  • a progress bar 711a is displayed on the folder 711.
  • the progress bar 711a can be used to indicate the overall progress of the application included in the folder 711 receiving data. It can be seen from the progress bar 711a that the application included in the folder 711 The application program has received part of the data sent from the electronic device 200.
  • a prompt bar 711b may be displayed on the folder 711. The prompt bar 711b may be used to prompt the user that the application program included in the folder 711 is receiving data.
  • the electronic device 100 can detect the user's operation (such as a long press operation) on the folder 711 and respond to In this operation, the electronic device 100 may display the window 720 as exemplarily shown in FIG. 7B , and the window may include an option 721 , and the option 721 may be used to display the folder 711 as a large folder. Further, the electronic device 100 can detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 721. In response to the operation, the electronic device 100 can display the folder 711 as a large folder in FIG. 7C, so that the user can view The migration progress is made to the data of each application included in this folder.
  • the user's operation such as a long press operation
  • the electronic device 100 may support the user to click the folder shown in FIG. 7C , and then the electronic device 100 may display the migration progress information of the data of the larger application program in FIG. 7D .
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the display form (such as shape, color, transparency, etc.) of the progress bar.
  • it can be a fan shape as shown in Figure 7A or other shapes (such as a ring shape). , which can reduce the occlusion of the folder), etc.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the display form (such as display position, shape, etc.) of the above prompt bar.
  • you can display is shown on the folder shown in Figure 7A, and may also be displayed in other locations of the folder (eg, below the folder).
  • the percentage of data received can also be displayed on the folder, for example, the folder receiving in the "receiving" state If 40% of the data has been received, then “40%” can be displayed on the folder; for another example, if the folder in the "waiting to receive” state has not yet received data, then "0%” can be displayed on the folder;
  • 7E to 7H are a set of user interfaces involved in the process of the electronic device 200 displaying the overall migration progress prompt information of the data of the application program included in the folder in real time at a "folder granularity”.
  • the user interface 730 illustrated in FIG. 7E may be a user interface provided by a “desktop” application of the electronic device 200 .
  • the user interface may include one or more folders (eg, folder 731 , etc.), and the applications included in the one or more folders may be applications that the electronic device 200 is migrating data to the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 200 can use the “folder granularity” in the user interface 730 shown in FIG. 7E to The overall migration progress prompt information of the data of the application program included in the folder is displayed in real time.
  • the electronic device 200 can display a progress bar of the data sent by the application program included in the folder on the folder; for another example, the electronic device 200 can also display on the folder a progress bar of the application program included in the folder.
  • the status of data sent by the applications included in the folder is displayed on the folder (for example, "Sending", "To be sent").
  • application 1 and application 2 are also taken as examples.
  • Application 1 and application 2 are both applications in folder 731 .
  • a progress bar 731a is displayed on the folder 731.
  • the progress bar 731a can be used to indicate the overall progress of sending data by the application program included in the folder 731. From the progress bar 731a, it can be seen that the progress bar 731a included in the folder 731
  • the application program has sent part of the data to the electronic device 100.
  • a prompt bar 731b may be displayed on the folder 731.
  • the prompt bar 731b may be used to prompt the user that the application program included in the folder 731 is sending data.
  • the electronic device 100 can detect the user's operation (such as a long press operation) on the folder 731 and respond to In this operation, the electronic device 100 may display the window 740 exemplarily shown in FIG. 7F , which may include an option 741 , and the option 741 may be used to display the folder 731 as a large folder. Further, the electronic device 100 can detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 741. In response to the operation, the electronic device 100 can display the folder 731 as a large folder in FIG. 7G, so that the user can view The migration progress is made to the data of each application included in this folder.
  • the user's operation such as a long press operation
  • the electronic device 200 may support the user to click the folder shown in FIG. 7G, and then the electronic device 100 may display the migration progress information of the data of the larger application program in FIG. 7H.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the display form (such as shape, color, transparency, etc.) of the progress bar.
  • it can be a fan shape as shown in Figure 7E or other shapes (such as a ring shape). , which can reduce the occlusion of the folder), etc.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the display form (such as display position, shape, etc.) of the above prompt bar.
  • it can be displayed on the folder shown in Figure 7E, or it can be displayed in other locations of the folder (for example, below the folder).
  • the percentage of received data can also be displayed on the folder, for example, the folder sending in the "Sending" state If 40% of the data has been sent, then “40%” can be displayed on the folder; for example, if the folder in the "pending" state has not yet sent data, then "0%” can be displayed on the folder;
  • the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 can also support the user to operate on the icon of the application that is undergoing data migration, so as to migrate the data of the application first, so that the user can migrate the data as soon as possible.
  • Use the application, and corresponding prompt information can be displayed to prompt the user that the application's data has been migrated first.
  • the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 give priority to migrating application data and display relevant prompt information. It may include but is not limited to the following two types: one is that the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 migrate the data of the application program first and display relevant prompt information at the "granularity of independent applications"; the other is that the electronic device 100 and The electronic device 200 preferentially migrates the data of the applications included in the folder based on the "granularity of the folder" and displays relevant prompt information, which are described in detail below:
  • 8A-8D exemplarily illustrate a series of user interfaces involved in the process of the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 migrating application data preferentially and displaying relevant prompt information at the "independent application granularity".
  • the user interface 810 illustrated in FIG. 8A may be a user interface provided by a “desktop” application of the electronic device 100 .
  • the user interface may include one or more application icons (such as application 1 icon, application 2 icon, etc.), and the application corresponding to the one or more application icons may be the application that the electronic device 200 is sending to.
  • the icon of each application can display prompt information on the migration progress of the data of the application in real time.
  • Application 2 is waiting to receive data, that is, it has not started receiving data yet. If the user wants to preferentially migrate the data of application program 2, then the electronic device 100 can detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on the icon of application program 2, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 can preferentially receive the data of the application program 2. At the same time, the electronic device 100 can also update and display the "to be received" prompt bar shown in FIG. 8A to the "priority receiving" prompt bar shown in FIG. 8B. In addition, the electronic device 100 may also send a message to the electronic device 200 so as to notify the electronic device 200 to send the data of the application 2 first.
  • the electronic device 100 may also send a message to the electronic device 200 so as to notify the electronic device 200 to send the data of the application 2 first.
  • the electronic device 200 can send the data of the application program first.
  • the electronic device 200 can also display a prompt bar of the data sending status of the application program 2 as shown in the figure.
  • the "Priority Sending" prompt bar shown in 8C shown in 8C. In this way, the user can easily know whether the data of application 2 has been successfully migrated first.
  • the above description uses the user's operation of the electronic device 100 as an example to introduce the process of prioritizing the data migration of the application program 2. It is easy to understand that the user can also implement the priority migration of the data of the application program 2 by operating the electronic device 200.
  • FIG 8D it can be seen that application 2 is waiting to send data, that is, it has not started sending data yet. If the user wants to migrate the data of application 2 first, then the electronic device 200 can detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on the icon of application 2, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 200 can send the application's data first. At the same time, the electronic device 200 can also update and display the "to be sent" prompt bar shown in Figure 8D to the "priority sending" prompt bar shown in Figure 8C. In addition, the electronic device 200 may also send a message to the electronic device 100 to notify the electronic device 100 to receive the data of the application program 2 in priority.
  • the electronic device 200 may also send a message to the electronic device 100 to notify the electronic device 100 to receive the data of the application program 2 in priority.
  • the electronic device 100 can receive the data of the application program first, and at the same time, the electronic device 100 can also update the "to be received" prompt bar shown in Figure 8A
  • the "Priority Receiving" prompt bar shown in Figure 8B is displayed. In this way, the user can easily know whether the data of application 2 has been successfully migrated first.
  • 9A to 9D exemplarily illustrate a series of users involved in the process of the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 preferentially migrating data of applications included in the folder at a "folder granularity" and displaying related prompt information. interface.
  • the user interface 910 illustrated in FIG. 9A may be a user interface provided by a “desktop” application of the electronic device 100 .
  • the user interface may include one or more folders (such as folder 911, folder 912, etc.), and the applications included in this one or more folders may be the applications that the electronic device 200 is migrating to the electronic device 100. app.
  • Each folder can display the overall migration progress prompt information of the application data included in the folder in real time.
  • the applications included in the folder 912 are all waiting to receive data, that is, they have not started receiving data yet.
  • the electronic device 100 may detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on the folder 912, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may preferentially receive the file.
  • the electronic device 100 can also update and display the "to be received" prompt bar shown in FIG. 9A to the "priority receiving" prompt bar shown in FIG. 9B.
  • the electronic device 100 may also send a message to the electronic device 200 in order to notify the electronic device 200 to send data of the application program included in the folder 912 with priority.
  • the electronic device 200 can send the data of the application included in the folder 912 first.
  • the electronic device 200 can also send the application included in the folder 912.
  • the prompt bar of the program sending data status is displayed as the "priority sending" prompt bar shown in Figure 9C. In this way, it is convenient for the user to know whether the data of the application program included in the folder 912 has been successfully migrated first.
  • the above description uses the user's operation of the electronic device 100 as an example to introduce the process of prioritizing the migration of the data of the applications included in the folder 912. It is easy to understand that the user can also implement the priority migration of the applications included in the folder 912 by operating the electronic device 200. program data.
  • the electronic device 200 may detect that the user is targeting the file. In response to the operation of the folder 912 (such as a click operation), the electronic device 200 can send the data of the application program included in the folder 912 with priority. At the same time, the electronic device 200 can also send the "to be sent" shown in FIG. 9D
  • the prompt bar is updated and displayed as the "Priority Sending" prompt bar shown in Figure 9C.
  • the electronic device 200 may also send a message to the electronic device 100 in order to notify the electronic device 100 to preferentially receive data of the application program included in the folder 912 . Further, after the electronic device 100 receives the above message sent by the electronic device 200, the electronic device 100 can preferentially receive the data of the application program included in the folder 912. At the same time, the electronic device 100 can also change the "to-be" shown in FIG. 9A. The "receiving" prompt bar is updated and displayed as the "priority receiving" prompt bar shown in Figure 9B. In this way, it is convenient for the user to know whether the data of the application program included in the folder 912 has been successfully migrated first.
  • the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 can also support the user to operate on the icon of the application that is undergoing data migration to stop migrating the data of the application.
  • Possible ways for the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 to stop migrating application data may include but are not limited to the following two methods: one is to stop the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 at the "granularity of independent applications” Migrate the data of the application program; the other method is that the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 stop migrating the data of the application program included in the folder at the "granularity of the folder", which will be introduced in detail below:
  • 10A-10K exemplarily illustrate a series of user interfaces involved in the process of the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 migrating data of an application program at "independent application granularity".
  • the user interface 1010 illustrated in FIG. 10A may be a user interface provided by a “desktop” application of the electronic device 200 .
  • the user interface may include one or more application icons (such as application 1 icon, application 2 icon, etc.), and the application corresponding to the one or more application icons may be the application that the electronic device 200 is sending to.
  • the icon of each application can display prompt information on the migration progress of the data of the application in real time.
  • Application 2 is waiting to send data, that is, it has not started sending data yet. If the user wants to stop migrating the data of Application 2, then the electronic device 200 can detect the user's operation (such as a long press operation) on the icon of Application 2, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 200 can The option 1011 shown as an example in FIG. 10B is displayed on the icon, and the option 1011 can be used to stop migrating the data of application 2.
  • the electronic device 200 can detect the user's operation (such as a long press operation) on the icon of Application 2, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 200 can The option 1011 shown as an example in FIG. 10B is displayed on the icon, and the option 1011 can be used to stop migrating the data of application 2.
  • the electronic device 200 may also display the window 1020 illustratively shown in FIG. 10C , and the window 1020 may include an option 1021.
  • 1021 can be used for the user to stop migrating application 2's data. That is to say, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the form in which the electronic device 200 displays the option "for stopping migrating data of application program 2".
  • the electronic device 200 may detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on the option 1011 shown in FIG. 10B (or the option 1021 shown in FIG. 10C ), and in response to the operation, the electronic device 200 may stop migrating the application 2 At the same time, referring to Figure 10D, the electronic device 200 can also cancel the display of the migration progress prompt information (such as a progress bar, a "to be sent" prompt bar) of the data of Application 2 on the icon of Application 2. In this way, it is convenient for the user to know whether the data of application 2 has been successfully stopped and migrated.
  • the migration progress prompt information such as a progress bar, a "to be sent" prompt bar
  • the electronic device 200 may also send a message to the electronic device 100 to notify the electronic device 100 to stop receiving data from the application program 2 . Further, after the electronic device 100 receives the above message sent by the electronic device 200, the electronic device 100 can stop receiving the data of the application program 2. At the same time, referring to Figure 10E, the electronic device 100 can also cancel the display of the icon of the application program 2, Alternatively, referring to FIG. 10F , the electronic device 100 can also display the icon of the application program 2 in grayscale to prompt the user that the application program 2 is in an unavailable state. In this way, it is convenient for the user to know whether the data of application 2 has been successfully stopped and migrated.
  • the electronic device 100 may detect the user's operation (such as a long press operation) on the icon of the application 2 , and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may display the window 1030 exemplarily shown in FIG. 10G .
  • the window 1030 One or more options (such as option 1031, option 1032, option 1033) can be included.
  • Option 1031 can be used to continue migrating the data of application 2.
  • Option 1032 can be used to download application 2 from the application market.
  • Option 1033 can be used. To remove the icon of application 2.
  • the electronic device 100 can detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 1031, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 can continue to migrate Application 2 At the same time, referring to Figure 10H, the electronic device 100 can also cancel the grayscale display of the icon of Application 2, and display the migration progress prompt information (such as a progress bar, "To be received" prompt bar). In addition, the electronic device 100 may also send a message to the electronic device 200 to notify the electronic device 200 to continue sending data of the application program 2. Further, after the electronic device 200 receives the above message sent by the electronic device 100, the electronic device 200 can continue to send the data of the application program 2.
  • the electronic device 200 200 can also display the migration progress prompt information of the data of Application 2 on the icon of Application 2 (for example, a progress bar, a "to be sent" prompt bar). In this way, it is convenient for the user to know whether the data of application 2 has been successfully migrated.
  • the electronic device 100 can detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 1032, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 can open the application market and Download Application 2. After the download and installation is complete, the user can use Application 2.
  • the user's operation such as a click operation
  • the electronic device 100 may detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 1033, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may perform the operation as shown in FIG. 10E to cancel the display of the application 2 icon.
  • the user's operation such as a click operation
  • the above description uses the user's operation of the electronic device 200 as an example to introduce the process of stopping the data migration of the application program 2. It is easy to understand that the user can also stop the migration of the data of the application program 2 by operating the electronic device 100.
  • FIG. 10H it can be seen that application 2 is waiting to receive data, that is, it has not started receiving data yet. If the user wants to stop migrating the data of Application 2, then the electronic device 100 can detect the user's operation (such as a long press operation) on the icon of Application 2, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 can The option 1041 shown exemplarily in FIG. 10I is displayed on the icon, and the option 1041 can be used to stop migrating the data of application 2.
  • the user's operation such as a long press operation
  • the electronic device 100 may also display the window 1050 illustratively shown in FIG. 10J , and the window 1050 may include an option 1051.
  • 1051 can be used to stop migrating application 2's data. That is to say, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the form in which the electronic device 100 displays the option "for stopping migrating data of application program 2".
  • the electronic device 100 may detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 1041 shown in FIG. 10I (or option 1051 shown in FIG. 10J ), and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may stop migrating application 2 At the same time, referring to Figure 10E, the electronic device 100 can also cancel the display of the icon of Application 2, or, referring to Figure 10F, the electronic device 100 can also display the icon of Application 2 in grayscale to prompt the user to apply 2 is in an unavailable state. In this way, it is convenient for the user to know whether the data of application 2 has been successfully stopped and migrated.
  • the user's operation such as a click operation
  • the electronic device 100 may also send a message to the electronic device 200 to notify the electronic device 200 to stop sending the data of the application program 2 . Further, after the electronic device 200 receives the above message sent by the electronic device 100, the electronic device 100 can stop sending the data of the application program 2. At the same time, referring to FIG. 10D, the electronic device 200 can also cancel the icon on the application program 2. Display the migration progress prompt information of the data of application 2 (such as progress bar, "to be sent" prompt bar). In this way, it is convenient for the user to know whether the data of application 2 has been successfully stopped and migrated.
  • the user After stopping the migration of the data of Application 2, in addition to continuing to migrate the data of Application 2 by performing an operation (such as a click operation) on the electronic device 100 for the option 1031 shown in FIG. 10G, the user can also perform an operation on the electronic device 100. Operations are performed on device 200 to continue migrating the data of application 2.
  • an operation such as a click operation
  • the electronic device 200 may detect the user's operation (such as a long press operation) on the icon of the application program 2 , and in response to the operation, the electronic device 200 may display the window 1060 as shown in the example of FIG. 10K .
  • One or more options eg, option 1061 may be included in 1060, and option 1061 may be used to continue migrating application 2's data.
  • the electronic device 200 can detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 1061, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 200 can continue to migrate the data of application program 2, while , as shown in FIG. 10A , the electronic device 200 can also display the migration progress prompt information (such as a progress bar, a "to be sent" prompt bar) of the data of the application program 2 on the icon of the application program 2.
  • the electronic device 200 may also send a message to the electronic device 100 to notify the electronic device 100 to continue receiving data from the application program 2 . Further, after the electronic device 100 receives the above message sent by the electronic device 200, the electronic device 100 can continue to receive the data of the application program 2.
  • the electronic device 100 can also display on the icon of the application program 2 as shown in Figure 10H Migration progress prompt information of application 2's data (such as progress bar, "to be received” prompt bar). In this way, it is convenient for the user to know whether the data of application 2 has been successfully migrated.
  • 11A-11I exemplarily illustrate a series of user interfaces involved in the process of the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 stopping migrating data of applications included in the folder at a "folder granularity".
  • the user interface 1110 illustrated in FIG. 11A may be a user interface provided by a “desktop” application of the electronic device 100 .
  • the user interface may include one or more folders (such as folder 1111, folder 1112, etc.), and the applications included in this one or more folders may be the applications that the electronic device 200 is migrating to the electronic device 100. app. every article
  • the overall migration progress prompt information of the application data included in the folder can be displayed in real time on the folder.
  • the applications included in the folder 1112 are all waiting to send data, that is, they have not started sending data yet.
  • the electronic device 200 may detect the user's operation (such as a long press operation) on the folder 1112, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 200 may display an image.
  • 11B illustrates the window 1120.
  • the window 1120 can include one or more options (such as option 1121, option 1122).
  • Option 1121 can be used to display the folder 1112 as a large folder, and option 1122 can be used to stop migration.
  • Folder 1112 contains the data of the application.
  • the electronic device 200 may detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 1122 shown in FIG. 11B , and in response to the operation, the electronic device 200 may stop migrating data of the application program included in the folder 1112 , and at the same time, Referring to FIG. 11C , the electronic device 200 can also cancel the display of the overall migration progress prompt information (eg, progress bar, “to be sent” prompt bar) of the data of the application program included in the folder 1112 on the folder 1112 . In this way, it is convenient for the user to know whether the data of the application program included in the folder 1112 has been successfully stopped and migrated.
  • the overall migration progress prompt information eg, progress bar, “to be sent” prompt bar
  • the electronic device 200 may also send a message to the electronic device 100 in order to notify the electronic device 100 to stop receiving data of the application program included in the folder 1112 . Further, after the electronic device 100 receives the above message sent by the electronic device 200, the electronic device 100 can stop receiving data of the application program included in the folder 1112. At the same time, referring to FIG. 11D, the electronic device 100 can also cancel the display of the folder. 1112, or, referring to FIG. 11E, the electronic device 100 can also display the folder 1112 in grayscale to prompt the user that the folder 1112 is in an unavailable state. In this way, it is convenient for the user to know whether the data of the application program included in the folder 1112 has been successfully stopped and migrated.
  • the electronic device 100 may detect the user's operation on the folder 1112 (such as a long press operation). In response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may display the window 1130 as exemplarily shown in FIG. 11F , and the window 1130 may include One or more options (e.g., option 1131, option 1132, option 1133, option 1134), option 1131 can be used to display folder 1112 as a large folder, option 1132 can be used to continue migrating applications included in folder 1112 data, option 1133 can be used to download the application included in the folder 1112 from the application market, and option 1134 can be used to remove the folder 1112.
  • options e.g., option 1131, option 1132, option 1133, option 1134
  • the electronic device 100 may detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on the option 1132, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may Continue to migrate the data of the applications included in the folder 1112. At the same time, referring to FIG. 11G, the electronic device 100 can also cancel the grayscale display of the folder 1112 and display the data of the applications included in the folder 1112 on the folder 1112.
  • the overall data migration progress prompt information (such as progress bar, "to be received" prompt bar).
  • the electronic device 100 may also send a message to the electronic device 200 to notify the electronic device 200 to continue sending data of the application program included in the folder 1112 .
  • the electronic device 200 can continue to send the data of the application program included in the folder 1112. At the same time, the electronic device 200 can also display the folder on the folder 1112.
  • the overall migration progress prompt information of the application data included in 1112 (such as progress bar, "to be sent" prompt bar). In this way, it is convenient for the user to know whether the data of the application program included in the folder 1112 has been successfully migrated.
  • the electronic device 100 may detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 1133, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 The application market can be opened and the applications included in the folder 1112 can be downloaded. After the download and installation are completed, the user can use the applications included in the folder 1112 .
  • the user's operation such as a click operation
  • the electronic device 100 can detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 1134, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 can cancel as shown in FIG. 11D Display folder 1112.
  • the user's operation such as a click operation
  • the above description uses the user's operation of the electronic device 200 as an example to introduce the process of stopping the migration of the data of the applications included in the folder 1112. It is easy to understand that the user can also stop the migration of the applications included in the folder 1112 by operating the electronic device 100. program data.
  • the electronic device 100 may detect the user's operation (such as a long press operation) on the folder 1112, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may display an image.
  • 11H illustrates an exemplary window 1140.
  • the window 1140 may include one or more options (such as option 1141, option 1142).
  • Option 1141 may be used to display the folder 1112 as a large folder, and option 1142 may be used to stop migration.
  • Folder 1112 contains the data of the application.
  • the electronic device 100 may detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 1142 shown in FIG. 11H, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may stop receiving data of the application program included in the folder 1112, and at the same time, Referring to Figure 11D, the electronic device 100 can also cancel the display of the folder 1112, or, referring to Figure 11E, the electronic device 100 can also grayscale the folder 1112. Displayed to prompt the user that folder 1112 is unavailable. In this way, it is convenient for the user to know whether the data of the application program included in the folder 1112 has been successfully stopped and migrated.
  • the user's operation such as a click operation
  • the electronic device 100 may also send a message to the electronic device 200 in order to notify the electronic device 200 to stop sending data of the application program included in the folder 1112 . Further, after the electronic device 200 receives the above message sent by the electronic device 100, the electronic device 100 can stop sending data of the application program included in the folder 1112. At the same time, referring to FIG. 11C, the electronic device 200 can also Cancel the display of overall migration progress prompt information (for example, progress bar, "to be sent" prompt bar) of the data of the application program included in the folder 1112. In this way, it is convenient for the user to know whether the data of the application program included in the folder 1112 has been successfully migrated.
  • overall migration progress prompt information for example, progress bar, "to be sent" prompt bar
  • the user can also perform operations on the electronic device 200 to continue migrating data of the applications included in the folder 1112 .
  • the electronic device 200 may detect the user's operation on the folder 1112 (for example, a long press operation). In response to the operation, the electronic device 200 may display the window 1150 shown in the example of FIG. 11I . In the window 1150 One or more options may be included (eg, option 1151 ) that may be used to continue migrating data for applications included in folder 1112 .
  • the electronic device 200 may detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 1151, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 200 may continue to migrate the folder. 1112. At the same time, the electronic device 200 can also display on the folder 1112, as shown in FIG. 11A, the overall migration progress prompt information (such as a progress bar, "to be Send” prompt). In addition, the electronic device 200 may also send a message to the electronic device 100 to notify the electronic device 100 to continue receiving data of the application program included in the folder 1112 . Further, after the electronic device 100 receives the above message sent by the electronic device 200, the electronic device 100 can continue to receive data of the application program included in the folder 1112.
  • the electronic device 100 may also send a message to the electronic device 100 to notify the electronic device 100 to continue receiving data of the application program included in the folder 1112.
  • the electronic device 100 can also add data to the folder 1112 as shown in FIG. 11G. 1112 displays overall migration progress prompt information (such as a progress bar, a “to be received” prompt bar) of the data of the application program included in the folder 1112 . In this way, it is convenient for the user to know whether the data of the application program included in the folder 1112 has been successfully migrated.
  • overall migration progress prompt information such as a progress bar, a “to be received” prompt bar
  • the electronic device 200 may display relevant prompt information to prompt the user that the application can be used on the electronic device 200 , but the data of the application has not yet been cloned on the electronic device 100 .
  • Figures 12A to 12F exemplarily illustrate the situation in which "the data of a certain application program on the electronic device 200 has been sent to the electronic device 100, but the data of the application program has not been cloned on the electronic device 100."
  • the electronic device 200 displays a series of user interfaces involved in the process of displaying relevant prompt information.
  • electronic device 200 can cancel the display of the application program on the icon of application program 2 2’s data migration progress prompt information (such as a progress bar, a “to be sent” prompt bar or a “sending” prompt bar), however, if the data of application 2 has not been cloned on the electronic device 100 (for example, as shown in Figure As shown in 12B, the application program 2 on the electronic device 100 is still in the "receiving" state, that is to say, the electronic device 100 is receiving the data of the application program 2 sent by the electronic device 200, but the reception has not yet been completed), then , the electronic device 200 can display relevant prompt information (such as the logo 1211 shown in FIG. 12A) on the icon of the application program 200 to prompt the user that the application program 2 can be used on the electronic device 200, but the data of the application program 2 has not yet been uploaded to the electronic device 200.
  • relevant prompt information such as the logo 1211 shown in FIG. 12A
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the display form (such as shape, display position, color, etc.) of the logo 1211.
  • the logo 1211 can be in the shape of an arrow as shown in Figure 12A, or in other shapes (such as a circle); for example, the logo 1211 can be displayed on the icon of Application 2 shown in Figure 12A, or can be displayed on the icon of Application 2 The icon is displayed elsewhere (for example, above the icon of Application 2).
  • the electronic device 200 can obtain a message from the electronic device 100 whether the data of the application program 2 has been cloned on the electronic device 100. If not, , then the electronic device 200 The logo 1211 shown exemplarily in FIG. 12A may be displayed.
  • the user can use application program 2. If the user generates new data (such as new user data) while using application program 2, Then, the electronic device 200 can support continuing to migrate the new data generated above to the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 200 can display relevant prompt information (such as identification 1212) on the icon of application 2 to remind the user that application 2 has generated new data.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the display form (such as shape, display position, color, etc.) of the logo 1212.
  • the logo 1212 may be in a circular shape as shown in FIG. 12C , or may be in other shapes (such as a square); for example, the logo 1212 may be displayed on the icon of Application 2 shown in FIG. 12C , or may be displayed on the icon of Application 2 The icon is displayed elsewhere (for example, above the icon of Application 2).
  • the electronic device 200 may detect the user's operation (such as a long press operation) on the icon of the application 2 , and in response to the operation, the electronic device 200 may display the window 1220 exemplarily shown in FIG. 12D .
  • the electronic device 200 may display the window 1220 exemplarily shown in FIG. 12D .
  • One or more options may be included.
  • Option 1221 may be used to continue migrating new data generated by the above-mentioned application program 2 to the electronic device 100.
  • Option 1222 may be used to no longer migrate the above-mentioned application program 2 to the electronic device 100. The generated new data is migrated to the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 200 can detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 1221, and in response to the operation, The electronic device 200 can continue to migrate the new data generated by the application program 2 to the electronic device 100.
  • the electronic device 200 can display the migration progress prompt information of the new data generated by the application program 2 as shown in FIG. 12E (for example, Progress bar, "Sending" prompt bar), so that the user can know whether the new data generated by the application program 2 has been successfully migrated to the electronic device 100.
  • the electronic device 200 can detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 1222, and in response to the operation, The electronic device 200 may no longer migrate new data generated by the application program 2 to the electronic device 100. At the same time, the electronic device 200 may cancel displaying the logo 1212 exemplarily shown in FIG. 12C.
  • the user's operation such as a click operation
  • the electronic device 200 can also automatically display the window 1230 illustratively shown in FIG. 12F.
  • the window 1230 can be used to prompt the user that the application 2 generates new data. If new data is generated, whether it is necessary to continue migrating the new data generated by the above-mentioned application program 2 to the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 200 can continue to migrate the new data generated by the above-mentioned application program 2 to the electronic device 100, and at the same time, the electronic device 200 can display the example shown in FIG. 12E
  • the shown migration progress prompt information (such as a progress bar, a "sending" prompt bar) of the new data generated by the application program 2 is so that the user can know whether the new data generated by the application program 2 has been successfully migrated to the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 200 may no longer migrate the new data generated by the application program 2 to the electronic device 100.
  • Figure 13 schematically shows the software structure of an electronic device 100 provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the software system of the electronic device 100 may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a microkernel architecture, a microservice architecture, or a cloud architecture.
  • the embodiment of this application takes the Android system with a layered architecture as an example to illustrate the software structure of the electronic device 100 .
  • the layered architecture divides the software into several layers, and each layer has clear roles and division of labor.
  • the layers communicate through software interfaces.
  • the Android system is divided into four layers, from top to bottom: application layer, application framework layer, Android runtime and system libraries, and kernel layer.
  • the application layer can include a series of application packages.
  • the application package can include camera, gallery, calendar, call, map, phone clone, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, settings, SMS and other applications.
  • the "mobile phone cloning" application can be used to migrate application data on the local device to another electronic device.
  • the specific process can be referred to the content in the aforementioned embodiments, and will not be described again here.
  • the functions implemented by the "Phone Clone” application can also be integrated in the "Settings” application, or the “Phone Clone” application can also be called through the entrance provided by the "Settings” application.
  • the application framework layer provides an application programming interface (API) and programming framework for applications in the application layer.
  • API application programming interface
  • the application framework layer includes some predefined functions.
  • the application framework layer can include a window manager, content provider, view system, phone manager, resource manager, notification manager, etc.
  • a window manager is used to manage window programs.
  • the window manager can obtain the display size, determine whether there is a status bar, lock the screen, capture the screen, etc.
  • Content providers are used to store and retrieve data and make this data accessible to applications.
  • Said data can include videos, images, audio, calls made and received, browsing history and bookmarks, phone books, etc.
  • the view system includes visual controls, such as controls that display text, controls that display pictures, etc.
  • a view system can be used to build applications.
  • the display interface can be composed of one or more views.
  • a display interface including a text message notification icon may include a view for displaying text and a view for displaying pictures.
  • the phone manager is used to provide communication functions of the electronic device 100 .
  • call status management including connected, hung up, etc.
  • the resource manager provides various resources to applications, such as localized strings, icons, pictures, layout files, video files, etc.
  • the notification manager allows applications to display notification information in the status bar, which can be used to convey notification-type messages and can automatically disappear after a short stay without user interaction.
  • the notification manager is used to notify download completion, message reminders, etc.
  • the notification manager can also be notifications that appear in the status bar at the top of the system in the form of charts or scroll bar text, such as notifications for applications running in the background, or notifications that appear on the screen in the form of conversation windows. For example, text information is prompted in the status bar, a beep sounds, the electronic device vibrates, the indicator light flashes, etc.
  • Android Runtime includes core libraries and virtual machines. Android runtime is responsible for the scheduling and management of the Android system.
  • the core library contains two parts: one is the functional functions that need to be called by the Java language, and the other is the core library of Android.
  • the application layer and application framework layer run in virtual machines.
  • the virtual machine executes the java files of the application layer and application framework layer into binary files.
  • the virtual machine is used to perform object life cycle management, stack management, thread management, security and exception management, and garbage collection and other functions.
  • System libraries can include multiple functional modules. For example: surface manager (surface manager), media libraries (Media Libraries), 3D graphics processing libraries (for example: OpenGL ES), 2D graphics engines (for example: SGL), etc.
  • the surface manager is used to manage the display subsystem and provides the fusion of 2D and 3D layers for multiple applications.
  • the media library supports playback and recording of a variety of commonly used audio and video formats, as well as static image files, etc.
  • the media library can support a variety of audio and video encoding formats, such as: MPEG4, H.264, MP3, AAC, AMR, JPG, PNG, etc.
  • the 3D graphics processing library is used to implement 3D graphics drawing, image rendering, composition, and layer processing.
  • 2D Graphics Engine is a drawing engine for 2D drawing.
  • the kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software.
  • the kernel layer contains at least display driver, camera driver, Bluetooth driver, and sensor driver.
  • the following exemplifies the workflow of the software and hardware of the electronic device 100 in conjunction with capturing the photographing scene.
  • the corresponding hardware interrupt is sent to the kernel layer.
  • the kernel layer processes touch operations into raw input events (including touch coordinates, timestamps of touch operations, and other information). Raw input events are stored in the kernel layer.
  • the application framework layer obtains the original input event from the kernel layer and identifies the control corresponding to the input event. Taking the touch operation as a touch click operation and the control corresponding to the click operation as a camera application icon control as an example, the camera application calls the interface of the application framework layer to start the camera application, and then starts the camera driver by calling the kernel layer. Camera 193 captures still images or video.
  • the software structure of the electronic device 200 may be the same as or similar to the software structure of the electronic device 100.
  • For relevant content about the software structure of the electronic device 200 refer to the relevant text description of the software structure of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 13. Herein No longer.
  • the following is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 100 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 schematically shows the structure of an electronic device 100 provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 100 may include: a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, and a battery. 142, antenna 1, sky Line 2, mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, headphone interface 170D, sensor module 180, button 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194 , and subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195, etc.
  • SIM subscriber identification module
  • the sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyro sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, and ambient light. Sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
  • the structure illustrated in the embodiment of the present application does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than shown in the figures, or combine some components, or split some components, or arrange different components.
  • the components illustrated may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more processing units.
  • the processor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (GPU), and an image signal processor. (image signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural-network processing unit (NPU) wait.
  • application processor application processor, AP
  • modem processor graphics processing unit
  • GPU graphics processing unit
  • image signal processor image signal processor
  • ISP image signal processor
  • controller memory
  • video codec digital signal processor
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • baseband processor baseband processor
  • NPU neural-network processing unit
  • different processing units can be independent devices or integrated in one or more processors.
  • the controller may be the nerve center and command center of the electronic device 100 .
  • the controller can generate operation control signals based on the instruction operation code and timing signals to complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
  • the processor 110 may also be provided with a memory for storing instructions and data.
  • the memory in processor 110 is cache memory. This memory may hold instructions or data that have been recently used or recycled by processor 110 . If the processor 110 needs to use the instructions or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated access is avoided and the waiting time of the processor 110 is reduced, thus improving the efficiency of the system.
  • processor 110 may include one or more interfaces.
  • Interfaces may include integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interface, pulse code modulation (pulse code modulation, PCM) interface, universal asynchronous receiver and transmitter (universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (MIPI), general-purpose input/output (GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and /or universal serial bus (USB) interface, etc.
  • I2C integrated circuit
  • I2S integrated circuit built-in audio
  • PCM pulse code modulation
  • UART universal asynchronous receiver and transmitter
  • MIPI mobile industry processor interface
  • GPIO general-purpose input/output
  • SIM subscriber identity module
  • USB universal serial bus
  • the I2C interface is a bidirectional synchronous serial bus, including a serial data line (SDA) and a serial clock line (derail clock line, SCL).
  • processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2C buses.
  • the processor 110 can separately couple the touch sensor 180K, charger, flash, camera 193, etc. through different I2C bus interfaces.
  • the processor 110 can be coupled to the touch sensor 180K through an I2C interface, so that the processor 110 and the touch sensor 180K communicate through the I2C bus interface to implement the touch function of the electronic device 100 .
  • the I2S interface can be used for audio communication.
  • processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2S buses.
  • the processor 110 can be coupled with the audio module 170 through the I2S bus to implement communication between the processor 110 and the audio module 170 .
  • the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the I2S interface to implement the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset.
  • the PCM interface can also be used for audio communications to sample, quantize and encode analog signals.
  • audio module 170 and wireless communication module 160 may be coupled through a PCM bus interface.
  • the audio module 170 can also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the PCM interface to implement the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset. Both the I2S interface and the PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
  • the UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication.
  • the bus can be a bidirectional communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication.
  • a UART interface is typically used to connect the processor 110 and the wireless communication module 160 .
  • the processor 110 communicates with the Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to implement the Bluetooth function.
  • the audio module 170 can transmit the audio signal to the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to implement the function of playing music through the Bluetooth headset.
  • the MIPI interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with peripheral devices such as the display screen 194 and the camera 193 .
  • MIPI interfaces include camera serial interface (CSI), display serial interface (DSI), etc.
  • the processor 110 and the camera 193 communicate through a CSI interface to implement the shooting function of the electronic device 100 .
  • the processor 110 and the display screen 194 communicate through the DSI interface to implement the display function of the electronic device 100 .
  • the GPIO interface can be configured through software.
  • the GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or as a data signal.
  • the GPIO interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with the camera 193, display screen 194, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, sensor module 180, etc.
  • the GPIO interface can also be configured as an I2C interface, I2S interface, UART interface, MIPI interface, etc.
  • the USB interface 130 is an interface that complies with the USB standard specification, and may be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, etc.
  • the USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 100, and can also be used to transmit data between the electronic device 100 and peripheral devices. It can also be used to connect headphones to play audio through them. This interface can also be used to connect other terminal devices, such as AR devices.
  • the interface connection relationships between the modules illustrated in the embodiments of the present application are only schematic illustrations and do not constitute a structural limitation of the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may also adopt different interface connection methods in the above embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection methods.
  • the charging management module 140 is used to receive charging input from the charger.
  • the charger can be a wireless charger or a wired charger.
  • the charging management module 140 may receive charging input from the wired charger through the USB interface 130 .
  • the charging management module 140 may receive wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the electronic device 100 . While the charging management module 140 charges the battery 142, it can also provide power to the electronic device 100 through the power management module 141.
  • the power management module 141 is used to connect the battery 142, the charging management module 140 and the processor 110.
  • the power management module 141 receives input from the battery 142 and/or the charging management module 140, and supplies power to the processor 110, internal memory 121, external memory, display screen 194, camera 193, wireless communication module 160, etc.
  • the power management module 141 can also be used to monitor battery capacity, battery cycle times, battery health status (leakage, impedance) and other parameters.
  • the power management module 141 may also be provided in the processor 110 .
  • the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 may also be provided in the same device.
  • the wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be implemented through the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 150, the wireless communication module 160, the modem processor and the baseband processor.
  • Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals.
  • Each antenna in electronic device 100 may be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization. For example: Antenna 1 can be reused as a diversity antenna for a wireless LAN. In other embodiments, antennas may be used in conjunction with tuning switches.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can provide solutions for wireless communication including 2G/3G/4G/5G applied on the electronic device 100 .
  • the mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (LNA), etc.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1, perform filtering, amplification and other processing on the received electromagnetic waves, and transmit them to the modem processor for demodulation.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modem processor and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1 for radiation.
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be disposed in the processor 110 .
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be provided in the same device as at least part of the modules of the processor 110 .
  • a modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator.
  • the modulator is used to modulate the low-frequency baseband signal to be sent into a medium-high frequency signal.
  • the demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low-frequency baseband signal.
  • the demodulator then transmits the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing.
  • the application processor outputs sound signals through audio devices (not limited to speaker 170A, receiver 170B, etc.), or displays images or videos through display screen 194.
  • the modem processor may be a stand-alone device.
  • the modem processor may be independent of the processor 110 and may be provided in the same device as the mobile communication module 150 or other functional modules.
  • the wireless communication module 160 can provide applications on the electronic device 100 including wireless local area networks (WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) network), Bluetooth (bluetooth, BT), and global navigation satellites.
  • WLAN wireless local area networks
  • System global navigation satellite system, GNSS
  • frequency modulation frequency modulation, FM
  • near field communication technology near field communication, NFC
  • infrared technology infrared, IR
  • the wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module.
  • the wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110 .
  • the wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110, frequency modulate it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 2 for radiation.
  • the antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 is coupled to the mobile communication module 150, and the antenna 2 is coupled to the wireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device 100 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology.
  • the wireless communication technology may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access (CDMA), broadband Code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), time-division code division multiple access (TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and/or IR technology, etc.
  • the GNSS may include global positioning system (GPS), global navigation satellite system (GLONASS), Beidou navigation satellite system (BDS), quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi -zenith satellite system (QZSS) and/or satellite based augmentation systems (SBAS).
  • GPS global positioning system
  • GLONASS global navigation satellite system
  • BDS Beidou navigation satellite system
  • QZSS quasi-zenith satellite system
  • SBAS satellite based augmentation systems
  • the electronic device 100 implements display functions through a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like.
  • the GPU is an image processing microprocessor and is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor. GPUs are used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering.
  • Processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or alter display information.
  • the display screen 194 is used to display images, videos, etc.
  • Display 194 includes a display panel.
  • the display panel can use a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active matrix organic light emitting diode or an active matrix organic light emitting diode (active-matrix organic light emitting diode).
  • LCD liquid crystal display
  • OLED organic light-emitting diode
  • AMOLED organic light-emitting diode
  • FLED flexible light-emitting diode
  • Miniled MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light emitting diode (QLED), etc.
  • the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N display screens 194, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the electronic device 100 can implement the shooting function through an ISP, a camera 193, a video codec, a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like.
  • the ISP is used to process the data fed back by the camera 193. For example, when taking a photo, the shutter is opened, the light is transmitted to the camera sensor through the lens, the optical signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the camera sensor passes the electrical signal to the ISP for processing, and converts it into an image visible to the naked eye. ISP can also perform algorithm optimization on image noise, brightness, etc. ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene. In some examples, the ISP may be located in the camera 193.
  • Camera 193 is used to capture still images or video.
  • the object passes through the lens to produce an optical image that is projected onto the photosensitive element.
  • the photosensitive element can be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor.
  • CMOS complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor
  • the photosensitive element converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and then passes the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal.
  • ISP outputs digital image signals to DSP for processing.
  • DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other format image signals.
  • the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N cameras 193, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • Digital signal processors are used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, they can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 100 selects a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the frequency point energy.
  • Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video.
  • Electronic device 100 may support one or more video codecs. In this way, the electronic device 100 can play or record videos in multiple encoding formats, such as moving picture experts group (MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4, etc.
  • MPEG moving picture experts group
  • MPEG2 MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4, etc.
  • NPU is a neural network (NN) computing processor.
  • NN neural network
  • Intelligent cognitive applications of the electronic device 100 can be implemented through the NPU, such as image recognition, face recognition, speech recognition, text understanding, etc.
  • the external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100.
  • the external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to implement the data storage function. Such as saving music, videos, etc. files in external memory card.
  • Internal memory 121 may be used to store computer executable program code, which includes instructions.
  • the processor 110 executes instructions stored in the internal memory 121 to execute various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device 100 .
  • the internal memory 121 may include a program storage area and a data storage area. Among them, the stored program area can store an operating system, at least one application program required for a function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.).
  • the storage data area may store data created during use of the electronic device 100 (such as audio data, phone book, etc.).
  • the internal memory 121 may include high-speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as at least one disk storage device, flash memory device, universal flash storage (UFS), etc.
  • the electronic device 100 can implement audio functions through the audio module 170, the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the headphone interface 170D, and the application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
  • the audio module 170 is used to convert digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and is also used to convert analog audio input into digital audio signals. Audio module 170 may also be used to encode and decode audio signals. In some examples, the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110 , or some functional modules of the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110 .
  • Speaker 170A also called “speaker” is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • the electronic device 100 can listen to music through the speaker 170A, or listen to hands-free calls.
  • Receiver 170B also called “earpiece” is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • the electronic device 100 answers a call or a voice message, the voice can be heard by bringing the receiver 170B close to the human ear.
  • Microphone 170C also called “microphone” or “microphone” is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals. When making a call or sending a voice message, the user can speak close to the microphone 170C with the human mouth and input the sound signal to the microphone 170C.
  • the electronic device 100 may be provided with at least one microphone 170C. In other examples, the electronic device 100 may be provided with two microphones 170C. In addition to collecting sound signals, the electronic device 100 may also Implement noise reduction function. In other examples, the electronic device 100 can also be provided with three, four or more microphones 170C to collect sound signals, reduce noise, identify sound sources, implement directional recording functions, etc.
  • the headphone interface 170D is used to connect wired headphones.
  • the headphone interface 170D may be a USB interface 130, or may be a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface or a Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association of the USA (CTIA) standard interface.
  • OMTP open mobile terminal platform
  • CTIA Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association of the USA
  • the pressure sensor 180A is used to sense pressure signals and can convert the pressure signals into electrical signals.
  • pressure sensor 180A may be disposed on display screen 194 .
  • pressure sensors 180A such as resistive pressure sensors, inductive pressure sensors, capacitive pressure sensors, etc.
  • a capacitive pressure sensor may include at least two parallel plates of conductive material.
  • the electronic device 100 determines the intensity of the pressure based on the change in capacitance.
  • the electronic device 100 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 180A.
  • the electronic device 100 may also calculate the touched position based on the detection signal of the pressure sensor 180A.
  • touch operations acting on the same touch location but with different touch operation intensities can correspond to different operation instructions. For example: when a touch operation with a touch operation intensity less than the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction to view the short message is executed. When a touch operation with a touch operation intensity greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction to create a new short message is executed.
  • the gyro sensor 180B may be used to determine the motion posture of the electronic device 100 .
  • the angular velocity of electronic device 100 about three axes ie, x, y, and z axes
  • the gyro sensor 180B can be used for image stabilization. For example, when the shutter is pressed, the gyro sensor 180B detects the angle at which the electronic device 100 shakes, calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate based on the angle, and allows the lens to offset the shake of the electronic device 100 through reverse movement to achieve anti-shake.
  • the gyro sensor 180B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory game scenes.
  • Air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure. In some examples, the electronic device 100 calculates the altitude through the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 180C to assist positioning and navigation.
  • Magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor.
  • the electronic device 100 may utilize the magnetic sensor 180D to detect the opening and closing of the flip holster.
  • the electronic device 100 may detect opening and closing of the flip according to the magnetic sensor 180D. Then, based on the detected opening and closing status of the leather case or the opening and closing status of the flip cover, features such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
  • the acceleration sensor 180E can detect the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes). When the electronic device 100 is stationary, the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected. It can also be used to identify the posture of the electronic device 100 and be used in horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometer and other applications.
  • Distance sensor 180F for measuring distance.
  • Electronic device 100 can measure distance via infrared or laser. In some examples, when shooting a scene, the electronic device 100 may utilize the distance sensor 180F to measure distance to achieve fast focusing.
  • Proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, a light emitting diode (LED) and a light detector, such as a photodiode.
  • the light emitting diode may be an infrared light emitting diode.
  • the electronic device 100 emits infrared light outwardly through the light emitting diode.
  • Electronic device 100 uses photodiodes to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it can be determined that there is an object near the electronic device 100 . When insufficient reflected light is detected, the electronic device 100 may determine that there is no object near the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 can use the proximity light sensor 180G to detect when the user holds the electronic device 100 close to the ear for talking, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power.
  • the proximity light sensor 180G can also be used in holster mode, and pocket mode automatically unlocks and locks the screen.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L is used to sense ambient light brightness.
  • the electronic device 100 can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 194 according to the perceived ambient light brightness.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L can also be used to automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 180G to detect whether the electronic device 100 is in the pocket to prevent accidental touching.
  • Fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints.
  • the electronic device 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to achieve fingerprint unlocking, access to application locks, fingerprint photography, fingerprint answering of incoming calls, etc.
  • Temperature sensor 180J is used to detect temperature.
  • the electronic device 100 utilizes the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 180J to execute the temperature processing strategy. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 180J exceeds a threshold, the electronic device 100 reduces the performance of a processor located near the temperature sensor 180J in order to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection. In other examples, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 heats the battery 142 to prevent the low temperature from causing the electronic device 100 to shut down abnormally. In some other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 performs boosting on the output voltage of the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown caused by low temperature.
  • Touch sensor 180K also called “Touch Panel (TP)".
  • the touch sensor 180K can be disposed on the display screen 194.
  • the touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194 form a touch screen, which is also called a "touch screen”.
  • the touch sensor 180K is used to detect a touch operation on or near the touch sensor 180K.
  • the touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the touch event type.
  • Visual output related to the touch operation may be provided through display screen 194 .
  • the touch sensor 180K may also be provided on the electronic device 100 The surface is different from the position where the display screen 194 is located.
  • Bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human body's vocal part.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can also contact the human body's pulse and receive blood pressure beating signals.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M may also be provided in an earphone and combined into a bone conduction earphone.
  • the audio module 170 can analyze the voice signal based on the vibration signal of the vocal vibrating bone obtained by the bone conduction sensor 180M to implement the voice function.
  • the application processor can analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beating signal acquired by the bone conduction sensor 180M to implement the heart rate detection function.
  • the buttons 190 include a power button, a volume button, etc.
  • Key 190 may be a mechanical key. It can also be a touch button.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive key inputs and generate key signal inputs related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 100 .
  • the motor 191 can generate vibration prompts.
  • the motor 191 can be used for vibration prompts for incoming calls and can also be used for touch vibration feedback.
  • touch operations for different applications can correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
  • the motor 191 can also respond to different vibration feedback effects for touch operations in different areas of the display screen 194 .
  • Different application scenarios such as time reminders, receiving information, alarm clocks, games, etc.
  • the touch vibration feedback effect can also be customized.
  • the indicator 192 may be an indicator light, which may be used to indicate charging status, power changes, or may be used to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, etc.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is used to connect a SIM card.
  • the SIM card can be connected to or separated from the electronic device 100 by inserting it into the SIM card interface 195 or pulling it out from the SIM card interface 195 .
  • the electronic device 100 can support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • SIM card interface 195 can support Nano SIM card, Micro SIM card, SIM card, etc. Multiple cards can be inserted into the same SIM card interface 195 at the same time. The types of the plurality of cards may be the same or different.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with different types of SIM cards.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with external memory cards.
  • the electronic device 100 interacts with the network through the SIM card to implement functions such as calls and data communications.
  • the electronic device 100 employs an eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card.
  • the eSIM card can be embedded in the electronic device 100 and cannot be separated from the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 14 is only an example, and the electronic device 100 may have more or fewer components than shown in FIG. 14 , and two or more components may be combined. Or could have different component configurations.
  • the various components shown in Figure 14 may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits.
  • the structure of the electronic device 200 may be the same as or similar to the structure of the electronic device 100.
  • For relevant content about the structure of the electronic device 200 refer to the relevant text description of the structure of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 14, and will not be described again here.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another, e.g., the computer instructions may be transferred from a website, computer, server, or data center Transmission to another website, computer, server or data center through wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. that contains one or more available media integrated.
  • the available media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disk, hard disk, magnetic tape), optical media (eg, DVD), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state disk (SSD)), etc.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • User Interface Of Digital Computer (AREA)

Abstract

Disclosed in the present application are an interaction method and a related device. While performing data migration, an electronic device 100 (i.e., an electronic device for receiving data) and an electronic device 200 (i.e., an electronic device for sending data) can both support a user to quit a user interface for data migration so as to use other functions. In addition, the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 can also display on an icon of an application program transmission state information (such as information of "being sent/being received", "to be sent/to be received", schedule of data sending/data receiving, etc.) of data of the application program, and can support the user to preferentially transmit/stop transmitting the data of the application program by operating the icon of the application program. Thus, the method is flexible and convenient, and improves the user experience.

Description

交互方法及相关设备Interaction methods and related equipment
本申请要求于2022年06月27日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为202210739173.X、申请名称为“交互方法及相关设备”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to the Chinese patent application filed with the State Intellectual Property Office of China on June 27, 2022, with application number 202210739173. Applying.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及终端技术领域,尤其涉及一种交互方法及相关设备。The present application relates to the field of terminal technology, and in particular, to an interaction method and related equipment.
背景技术Background technique
随着终端技术的快速发展,一个电子设备上的应用程序的数据可以迁移到另外一个电子设备上,但是,在数据迁移过程中,电子设备的桌面上缺少相应的提示信息来使得用户获知数据迁移的状态,用户体验差。With the rapid development of terminal technology, application data on one electronic device can be migrated to another electronic device. However, during the data migration process, there is a lack of corresponding prompt information on the desktop of the electronic device to inform the user of the data migration. status and poor user experience.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请实施例提供了一种交互方法及相关设备,在进行数据迁移的同时,电子设备100(即接收数据的电子设备)和电子设备200(即发送数据的电子设备)均可以支持用户退出数据迁移的用户界面,来使用其他功能,此外,还可以在应用程序的图标上显示应用程序的数据的传输状态信息,并且可以支持用户通过操作应用程序的图标来优先传输/停止传输该应用程序的数据,灵活便捷,提高用户体验。Embodiments of the present application provide an interaction method and related devices. While performing data migration, both the electronic device 100 (that is, the electronic device that receives data) and the electronic device 200 (that is, the electronic device that sends data) can support users to exit data. The migrated user interface can be used to use other functions. In addition, the transfer status information of the application's data can also be displayed on the application's icon, and the user can be supported to prioritize/stop transferring the application's data by operating the application's icon. Data, flexible and convenient, improve user experience.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种交互方法,应用于第一电子设备,该方法包括:第一电子设备与第二电子设备建立通信连接;第一电子设备显示第一用户界面,第一用户界面为第一电子设备的桌面,第一用户界面中包括一个或多个应用程序的图标、一个或多个标识;其中,一个或多个应用程序的图标包括第一应用程序的图标,一个或多个标识包括第一标识和/或第二标识,第一标识用于指示第一电子设备接收第一数据的状态,第二标识用于指示第一电子设备接收第一数据的进度,第一数据是第二电子设备基于通信连接向第一电子设备发送的,第一数据为第一应用程序的数据。In a first aspect, embodiments of the present application provide an interaction method applied to a first electronic device. The method includes: the first electronic device establishes a communication connection with a second electronic device; the first electronic device displays a first user interface; A user interface is the desktop of the first electronic device, and the first user interface includes one or more application program icons and one or more logos; wherein the one or more application program icons include an icon of the first application program, One or more identifiers include a first identifier and/or a second identifier, the first identifier is used to indicate the status of the first electronic device receiving the first data, and the second identifier is used to indicate the progress of the first electronic device receiving the first data, The first data is sent by the second electronic device to the first electronic device based on the communication connection, and the first data is data of the first application program.
通过实施第一方面提供的方法,电子设备在进行数据迁移过程中可以在应用程序的图标上显示应用程序的数据的传输状态信息,便于用户获知应用程序的数据的迁移进度,提供用户体验。By implementing the method provided in the first aspect, the electronic device can display the transmission status information of the application's data on the application's icon during the data migration process, so as to facilitate the user to know the migration progress of the application's data and provide a user experience.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在第一电子设备显示第一用户界面之后,该方法还包括:在第一标识指示的状态为“待接收”状态,和/或,第二标识指示的进度为0的情况下,第一电子设备检测到用户针对第一应用程序的图标的第一操作;响应于第一操作,第一电子设备优先接收第一数据,并将第一标识指示的状态由“待接收”状态修改为“优先接收”状态,和/或,将第二标识指示的进度由“0”修改为“大于0”;第一电子设备向第二电子设备发送第一消息,第一消息用于指示第二电子设备向第一电子设备优先发送第一数据。In a possible implementation, after the first electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further includes: when the status indicated by the first identification is a "waiting to receive" state, and/or the progress indicated by the second identification. If it is 0, the first electronic device detects the user's first operation on the icon of the first application; in response to the first operation, the first electronic device preferentially receives the first data and sets the state indicated by the first identification by The "to be received" state is modified to the "priority receiving" state, and/or the progress indicated by the second identification is modified from "0" to "greater than 0"; the first electronic device sends the first message to the second electronic device, and the first electronic device sends the first message to the second electronic device. A message is used to instruct the second electronic device to send the first data to the first electronic device in priority.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在第一电子设备显示第一用户界面之后,该方法还包括:在第一标识指示的状态为“待接收”状态,和/或,第二标识指示的进度为0的情况下,第一电子设备检测到用户针对第一应用程序的图标的第二操作;响应于第二操作,第一电子设备显示第一选项,第一选项用于指示第一电子设备停止接收第一数据;第一电子设备检测到用户针对第一选项的第三操作;响应于第三操作,第一电子设备停止接收第一数据,并取消显示第一标识和第二标识;第一电子设备向第二电子设备发送第二消息,第二消息用于指示第二电子设备向第一电子设备停止发送第一数据。In a possible implementation, after the first electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further includes: when the status indicated by the first identification is a "waiting to receive" state, and/or the progress indicated by the second identification. If it is 0, the first electronic device detects the user's second operation on the icon of the first application; in response to the second operation, the first electronic device displays the first option, and the first option is used to indicate the first electronic device Stop receiving the first data; the first electronic device detects the user's third operation for the first option; in response to the third operation, the first electronic device stops receiving the first data and cancels display of the first logo and the second logo; An electronic device sends a second message to a second electronic device. The second message is used to instruct the second electronic device to stop sending the first data to the first electronic device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在第一电子设备停止接收第一数据之后,该方法还包括:第一电子设备检测到用户针对第一应用程序的图标的第四操作;响应于第四操作,第一电子设备显示第一窗口,第一窗口中包括一个或多个选项,一个或多个选项包括第二选项,第二选项用于指示第一电子设备继续接收第一数据;第一电子设备检测到用户针对第二选项的第五操作;响应于第五操作,第一电子设备显示第一标识和第二标识,并向第二电子设备发送第三消息,第三消息用于指示第二电子设备向第一电子设备继续发送第一数据。In a possible implementation, after the first electronic device stops receiving the first data, the method further includes: the first electronic device detects a fourth operation by the user on the icon of the first application; responding to the fourth operation , the first electronic device displays a first window, the first window includes one or more options, the one or more options include a second option, the second option is used to instruct the first electronic device to continue receiving the first data; the first electronic device The device detects the user's fifth operation for the second option; in response to the fifth operation, the first electronic device displays the first logo and the second logo, and sends a third message to the second electronic device, the third message being used to indicate the The second electronic device continues to send the first data to the first electronic device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一用户界面中还包括第一文件夹、第三标识和/或第四标识,第一文件夹中包括一个或多个第二应用程序的图标,第三标识用于指示第一电子设备接收第二数据的状态,第四标识 用于指示第一电子设备接收第二数据的进度,第二数据是第二电子设备基于通信连接向第一电子设备发送的,第二数据为一个或多个第二应用程序的数据。In a possible implementation, the first user interface also includes a first folder, a third identification and/or a fourth identification, the first folder includes one or more icons of the second application, and the third The identification is used to indicate the status of the first electronic device receiving the second data, and the fourth identification Used to indicate the progress of the first electronic device receiving second data. The second data is sent by the second electronic device to the first electronic device based on the communication connection. The second data is data of one or more second applications.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在第一电子设备显示第一用户界面之后,该方法还包括:在第三标识指示的状态为“待接收”状态,和/或,第四标识指示的进度为0的情况下,第一电子设备检测到用户针对第一文件夹的第六操作;响应于第六操作,第一电子设备优先接收第二数据,并将第三标识指示的状态由“待接收”状态修改为“优先接收”状态,和/或,将第四标识指示的进度由“0”修改为“大于0”;第一电子设备向第二电子设备发送第四消息,第四消息用于指示第二电子设备向第一电子设备优先发送第二数据。In a possible implementation, after the first electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further includes: when the status indicated by the third identification is a "waiting to receive" state, and/or the progress indicated by the fourth identification. If it is 0, the first electronic device detects the user's sixth operation on the first folder; in response to the sixth operation, the first electronic device receives the second data with priority, and changes the status indicated by the third identification to "waiting". The "receiving" state is modified to the "priority receiving" state, and/or the progress indicated by the fourth identification is modified from "0" to "greater than 0"; the first electronic device sends a fourth message to the second electronic device, and the fourth message Used to instruct the second electronic device to send the second data to the first electronic device preferentially.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在第一电子设备显示第一用户界面之后,该方法还包括:在第三标识指示的状态为“待接收”状态,和/或,第四标识指示的进度为0的情况下,第一电子设备检测到用户针对第一文件夹的第七操作;响应于第七操作,第一电子设备显示第三选项,第三选项用于指示第一电子设备停止接收第二数据;第一电子设备检测到用户针对第三选项的第八操作;响应于第八操作,第一电子设备停止接收第二数据,并取消显示第三标识和第四标识;第一电子设备向第二电子设备发送第五消息,第五消息用于指示第二电子设备向第一电子设备停止发送第二数据。In a possible implementation, after the first electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further includes: when the status indicated by the third identification is a "waiting to receive" state, and/or the progress indicated by the fourth identification. If it is 0, the first electronic device detects the user's seventh operation on the first folder; in response to the seventh operation, the first electronic device displays a third option, and the third option is used to instruct the first electronic device to stop receiving second data; the first electronic device detects the user's eighth operation for the third option; in response to the eighth operation, the first electronic device stops receiving the second data and cancels display of the third logo and the fourth logo; the first electronic device The device sends a fifth message to the second electronic device, where the fifth message is used to instruct the second electronic device to stop sending the second data to the first electronic device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在第一电子设备停止接收第二数据之后,该方法还包括:第一电子设备检测到用户针对第一文件夹的第九操作;响应于第九操作,第一电子设备显示第二窗口,第二窗口中包括一个或多个选项,一个或多个选项包括第四选项,第四选项用于指示第一电子设备继续接收第二数据;第一电子设备检测到用户针对第四选项的第十操作;响应于第十操作,第一电子设备显示第三标识和第四标识,并向第二电子设备发送第六消息,第六消息用于指示第二电子设备向第一电子设备继续发送第二数据。In a possible implementation, after the first electronic device stops receiving the second data, the method further includes: the first electronic device detects the user's ninth operation on the first folder; in response to the ninth operation, An electronic device displays a second window, the second window includes one or more options, the one or more options include a fourth option, and the fourth option is used to instruct the first electronic device to continue receiving the second data; the first electronic device detects to the user's tenth operation for the fourth option; in response to the tenth operation, the first electronic device displays the third logo and the fourth logo, and sends a sixth message to the second electronic device, and the sixth message is used to indicate that the second electronic device The device continues to send the second data to the first electronic device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一用户界面中还包括第一提示,第一提示用于提示用户第一电子设备正在接收第二电子设备发送的一个或多个应用程序的数据,并靠近放置第一电子设备和第二电子设备。In a possible implementation, the first user interface further includes a first prompt, which is used to prompt the user that the first electronic device is receiving data of one or more applications sent by the second electronic device and is approaching Place the first electronic device and the second electronic device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在第一电子设备显示第一用户界面之前,该方法还包括:第一电子设备显示第二用户界面,第二用户界面为第三应用程序的界面,第三应用程序用于第一电子设备接收第二电子设备发送的一个或多个应用程序的数据;第一电子设备检测到用户的第十一操作,第十一操作用于指示第一电子设备显示第一用户界面。In a possible implementation, before the first electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further includes: the first electronic device displays a second user interface, the second user interface is the interface of the third application program, and the third The application program is used for the first electronic device to receive data of one or more application programs sent by the second electronic device; the first electronic device detects the eleventh operation of the user, and the eleventh operation is used to instruct the first electronic device to display the a user interface.
在第一方面中,第一电子设备可以是电子设备100,第二电子设备可以是电子设备200,第一用户界面可以电子设备100的桌面,第一应用程序的图标可以是进行数据迁移的某一个应用程序的图标(例如图6A中所示的应用2的图标),第一数据可以是第一应用程序的数据,第一标识可以是指示接收第一数据的状态的标识(例如“待接收”、“接收中”等),第二标识可以是指示接收第一数据的进度的标识(例如进度条),第一操作可以是点击操作,第一消息可以是电子设备100在优先接收第一数据后向电子设备200发送的消息,第二操作可以是长按操作,第一选项可以是删除选项(例如图10I中的选项1041或图10J中的选项1051),第三操作可以是点击操作,第二消息是电子设备100在停止接收第一数据后向电子设备200发送的消息,第四操作可以是长按操作,第一窗口可以是图10G所示的窗口1030,第二选项可以是选项1031,第五操作可以是点击操作,第三消息可以是电子设备100在继续接收第一数据后向电子设备200发送的消息,第一文件夹可以是图9A所示的文件夹912,第二数据可以是第一文件夹中包括的一个或多个第二应用程序(例如应用3、应用4)的数据,第三标识可以是指示接收第二数据的状态的标识(例如“待接收”、“接收中”等),第四标识可以是指示接收第二数据的进度的标识(例如进度条),第六操作可以是点击操作,第四消息可以是电子设备100在优先接收第二数据后向电子设备200发送的消息,第七操作可以是长按操作,第三选项可以是删除选项(例如图11H中的选项1142),第八操作可以是点击操作,第五消息可以是电子设备100在停止接收第二数据后向电子设备200发送的消息,第九操作可以是长按操作,第二窗口可以是图11F所示的窗口1130,第四选项可以是选项1132,第十操作可以是点击操作,第六消息可以是电子设备100在继续接收第二数据后向电子设备200发送的消息,第一提示可以是图5A所示的提示条511,第二用户界面可以是图4F所示的界面,第三应用程序可以是手机克隆应用程序,第十一操作可以是返回桌面的操作。In the first aspect, the first electronic device may be the electronic device 100, the second electronic device may be the electronic device 200, the first user interface may be the desktop of the electronic device 100, and the icon of the first application may be an object for data migration. An icon of an application program (for example, the icon of application 2 shown in FIG. 6A), the first data may be data of the first application program, and the first identification may be an identification indicating a status of receiving the first data (for example, "to be received"). ", "receiving", etc.), the second identification may be an identification indicating the progress of receiving the first data (such as a progress bar), the first operation may be a click operation, and the first message may be that the electronic device 100 is receiving the first data with priority. After the data is sent to the electronic device 200, the second operation may be a long press operation, the first option may be a delete option (for example, option 1041 in Figure 10I or option 1051 in Figure 10J), and the third operation may be a click operation. , the second message is a message sent by the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 200 after stopping receiving the first data, the fourth operation may be a long press operation, the first window may be the window 1030 shown in FIG. 10G, and the second option may be Option 1031, the fifth operation may be a click operation, the third message may be a message sent by the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 200 after continuing to receive the first data, and the first folder may be the folder 912 shown in FIG. 9A. The second data may be data of one or more second applications (for example, application 3, application 4) included in the first folder, and the third identification may be an identification indicating a status of receiving the second data (for example, "to be received" , "receiving", etc.), the fourth identification may be an identification indicating the progress of receiving the second data (such as a progress bar), the sixth operation may be a click operation, and the fourth message may be that the electronic device 100 is receiving the second data with priority. For the message sent to the electronic device 200, the seventh operation may be a long press operation, the third option may be a delete option (for example, option 1142 in FIG. 11H), the eighth operation may be a click operation, and the fifth message may be an electronic device 100 sends a message to the electronic device 200 after stopping receiving the second data, the ninth operation may be a long press operation, the second window may be the window 1130 shown in Figure 11F, the fourth option may be option 1132, and the tenth operation may is a click operation, the sixth message may be a message sent by the electronic device 100 to the electronic device 200 after continuing to receive the second data, the first prompt may be the prompt bar 511 shown in Figure 5A, and the second user interface may be as shown in Figure 4F In the interface shown, the third application can be a mobile phone cloning application, and the eleventh operation can be an operation of returning to the desktop.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供了一种交互方法,应用于第二电子设备,该方法包括:第二电子设备与第一电子设备建立通信连接;第二电子设备显示第一用户界面,第一用户界面为第二电子设备的桌面,第一用户界面中包括一个或多个应用程序的图标、一个或多个标识;其中,一个或多个应用程序的图标包括第一应用程序的图标,一个或多个标识包括第一标识和/或第二标识,第一标识用于指示第二电子设备发送 第一数据的状态,第二标识用于指示第二电子设备发送第一数据的进度,第一数据是第二电子设备基于通信连接向第一电子设备发送的,第一数据为第一应用程序的数据。In a second aspect, embodiments of the present application provide an interaction method applied to a second electronic device. The method includes: the second electronic device establishes a communication connection with the first electronic device; the second electronic device displays the first user interface; A user interface is the desktop of the second electronic device, and the first user interface includes one or more application program icons and one or more logos; wherein the one or more application program icons include an icon of the first application program, One or more identifiers include a first identifier and/or a second identifier, and the first identifier is used to instruct the second electronic device to send The status of the first data, the second identification is used to indicate the progress of the second electronic device sending the first data, the first data is sent by the second electronic device to the first electronic device based on the communication connection, and the first data is the first application program The data.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在第二电子设备显示第一用户界面之后,该方法还包括:在第一标识指示的状态为“待发送”状态,和/或,第二标识指示的进度为0的情况下,第二电子设备检测到用户针对第一应用程序的图标的第一操作;响应于第一操作,第二电子设备优先发送第一数据,并将第一标识指示的状态由“待发送”状态修改为“优先发送”状态,和/或,将第二标识指示的进度由“0”修改为“大于0”;第二电子设备向第一电子设备发送第一消息,第一消息用于指示第一电子设备优先接收第二电子设备发送的第一数据。In a possible implementation, after the second electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further includes: when the status indicated by the first identification is a "to be sent" state, and/or the progress indicated by the second identification. If it is 0, the second electronic device detects the user's first operation on the icon of the first application; in response to the first operation, the second electronic device sends the first data with priority, and sets the status indicated by the first identification by The "to be sent" state is modified to the "priority sending" state, and/or the progress indicated by the second identification is modified from "0" to "greater than 0"; the second electronic device sends the first message to the first electronic device, and the second electronic device sends the first message to the first electronic device. A message is used to instruct the first electronic device to preferentially receive the first data sent by the second electronic device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在第二电子设备显示第一用户界面之后,该方法还包括:在第一标识指示的状态为“待发送”状态,和/或,第二标识指示的进度为0的情况下,第二电子设备检测到用户针对第一应用程序的图标的第二操作;响应于第二操作,第二电子设备显示第一选项,第一选项用于指示第二电子设备停止发送第一数据;第一电子设备检测到用户针对第一选项的第三操作;响应于第三操作,第二电子设备停止发送第一数据,并取消显示第一标识和第二标识;第二电子设备向第一电子设备发送第二消息,第二消息用于指示第一电子设备停止接收第二电子设备发送的第一数据。In a possible implementation, after the second electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further includes: when the status indicated by the first identification is a "to be sent" state, and/or the progress indicated by the second identification. If it is 0, the second electronic device detects the user's second operation on the icon of the first application; in response to the second operation, the second electronic device displays the first option, and the first option is used to indicate the second electronic device Stop sending the first data; the first electronic device detects the user's third operation for the first option; in response to the third operation, the second electronic device stops sending the first data and cancels display of the first logo and the second logo; The second electronic device sends a second message to the first electronic device, and the second message is used to instruct the first electronic device to stop receiving the first data sent by the second electronic device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在第二电子设备停止发送第一数据之后,该方法还包括:第二电子设备检测到用户针对第一应用程序的图标的第四操作;响应于第四操作,第二电子设备显示第一窗口,第一窗口中包括一个或多个选项,一个或多个选项包括第二选项,第二选项用于指示第二电子设备继续发送第一数据;第一电子设备检测到用户针对第二选项的第五操作;响应于第五操作,第二电子设备显示第一标识和第二标识,并向第一电子设备发送第三消息,第三消息用于指示第一电子设备继续接收第二电子设备发送的第一数据。In a possible implementation, after the second electronic device stops sending the first data, the method further includes: the second electronic device detects a fourth operation by the user on the icon of the first application; responding to the fourth operation , the second electronic device displays a first window, the first window includes one or more options, the one or more options include a second option, the second option is used to instruct the second electronic device to continue sending the first data; the first electronic device The device detects the user's fifth operation for the second option; in response to the fifth operation, the second electronic device displays the first logo and the second logo, and sends a third message to the first electronic device, the third message being used to indicate the An electronic device continues to receive the first data sent by the second electronic device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一用户界面中还包括第一文件夹、第三标识和/或第四标识,第一文件夹中包括一个或多个第二应用程序的图标,第三标识用于指示第一电子设备接收第二数据的状态,第四标识用于指示第一电子设备接收第二数据的进度,第二数据是第二电子设备基于通信连接向第一电子设备发送的,第二数据为一个或多个第二应用程序的数据。In a possible implementation, the first user interface also includes a first folder, a third identification and/or a fourth identification, the first folder includes one or more icons of the second application, and the third The identification is used to indicate the status of the first electronic device receiving the second data, and the fourth identification is used to indicate the progress of the first electronic device receiving the second data. The second data is sent by the second electronic device to the first electronic device based on the communication connection. , the second data is data of one or more second applications.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在第一电子设备显示第一用户界面之后,该方法还包括:在第三标识指示的状态为“待发送”状态,和/或,第四标识指示的进度为0的情况下,第一电子设备检测到用户针对第一文件夹的第六操作;响应于第六操作,第二电子设备优先发送第二数据,并将第三标识指示的状态由“待接收”状态修改为“优先接收”状态,和/或,将第四标识指示的进度由“0”修改为“大于0”;第二电子设备向第一电子设备发送第四消息,第四消息用于指示第一电子设备优先接收第二电子设备发送的第二数据。In a possible implementation, after the first electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further includes: when the status indicated by the third identification is a "to be sent" state, and/or the progress indicated by the fourth identification. If it is 0, the first electronic device detects the sixth operation of the user on the first folder; in response to the sixth operation, the second electronic device sends the second data with priority, and changes the status indicated by the third identification to "waiting". The receiving" state is modified to the "priority receiving" state, and/or the progress indicated by the fourth identification is modified from "0" to "greater than 0"; the second electronic device sends a fourth message to the first electronic device, and the fourth message Used to instruct the first electronic device to preferentially receive the second data sent by the second electronic device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在第一电子设备显示第一用户界面之后,该方法还包括:在第三标识指示的状态为“待接收”状态,和/或,第四标识指示的进度为0的情况下,第一电子设备检测到用户针对第一文件夹的第七操作;响应于第七操作,第一电子设备显示第三选项,第三选项用于指示第二电子设备停止发送第二数据;第一电子设备检测到用户针对第三选项的第八操作;响应于第八操作,第一电子设备停止发送第二数据,并取消显示第三标识和第四标识;第二电子设备向第一电子设备发送第五消息,第五消息用于指示第一电子设备停止接收第二电子设备发送的第二数据。In a possible implementation, after the first electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further includes: when the status indicated by the third identification is a "waiting to receive" state, and/or the progress indicated by the fourth identification. If it is 0, the first electronic device detects the user's seventh operation on the first folder; in response to the seventh operation, the first electronic device displays a third option, and the third option is used to instruct the second electronic device to stop sending. second data; the first electronic device detects the user's eighth operation for the third option; in response to the eighth operation, the first electronic device stops sending the second data and cancels the display of the third logo and the fourth logo; the second electronic device The device sends a fifth message to the first electronic device, where the fifth message is used to instruct the first electronic device to stop receiving the second data sent by the second electronic device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在第二电子设备停止发送第二数据之后,该方法还包括:第一电子设备检测到用户针对第一文件夹的第九操作;响应于第九操作,第一电子设备显示第二窗口,第二窗口中包括一个或多个选项,一个或多个选项包括第四选项,第四选项用于指示第二电子设备继续发送第二数据;第一电子设备检测到用户针对第四选项的第十操作;响应于第十操作,第二电子设备显示第三标识和第四标识,并向第一电子设备发送第六消息,第六消息用于指示第一电子设备继续接收第二电子设备发送的第二数据。In a possible implementation, after the second electronic device stops sending the second data, the method further includes: the first electronic device detects the user's ninth operation on the first folder; in response to the ninth operation, An electronic device displays a second window, the second window includes one or more options, the one or more options include a fourth option, and the fourth option is used to instruct the second electronic device to continue sending the second data; the first electronic device detects to the user's tenth operation for the fourth option; in response to the tenth operation, the second electronic device displays the third logo and the fourth logo, and sends a sixth message to the first electronic device, the sixth message is used to indicate that the first electronic device The device continues to receive the second data sent by the second electronic device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一用户界面中还包括第一提示,第一提示用于提示用户第二电子设备正在向第一电子设备发送一个或多个应用程序的数据,并靠近放置第一电子设备和第二电子设备。In a possible implementation, the first user interface also includes a first prompt, which is used to prompt the user that the second electronic device is sending data of one or more applications to the first electronic device and is placed close to the first electronic device. first electronic device and second electronic device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在第二电子设备显示第一用户界面之前,该方法还包括:第二电子设备显示第二用户界面,第二用户界面为第三应用程序的界面,第三应用程序用于第二电子设备向第二电子设备发送一个或多个应用程序的数据;第二电子设备检测到用户的第十一操作,第十一操作用于指示第二电子设备显示第一用户界面。In a possible implementation, before the second electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further includes: the second electronic device displays a second user interface, and the second user interface is the interface of the third application program, and the third The application program is used for the second electronic device to send data of one or more application programs to the second electronic device; the second electronic device detects the eleventh operation of the user, and the eleventh operation is used to instruct the second electronic device to display the first user interface.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第二用户界面中包括一个或多个应用程序的选项,一个或多个应用程序的选项按照第一顺序排列,第一顺序是系统预设的,或,第一顺序是系统基于用户使用一个或多个应用程序 的频率设置的,或,第一顺序是用户手动设置的;第一顺序用于指示第二电子设备向第一电子设备发送一个或多个应用程序的数据的顺序。In a possible implementation, the second user interface includes options for one or more applications, and the options for the one or more applications are arranged in a first order, where the first order is preset by the system, or, A sequence is a system based on the user's use of one or more applications The frequency is set, or the first order is manually set by the user; the first order is used to indicate the order in which the second electronic device sends data of one or more applications to the first electronic device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在第二电子设备显示第一用户界面之后,该方法还包括:第二电子设备取消显示第一标识和第二标识,并在第一用户界面中显示第五标识,第五标识用于指示第二电子设备发送完成第一数据,且第一电子设备未接收完成第一数据。In a possible implementation, after the second electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further includes: the second electronic device cancels display of the first logo and the second logo, and displays a fifth logo in the first user interface. The fifth identification is used to indicate that the second electronic device has completed sending the first data, and the first electronic device has not completed receiving the first data.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在第二电子设备在第一用户界面中显示第五标识之后,该方法还包括:第二电子设备在第一用户界面中显示第六标识,第六标识用于指示第一应用程序生成了第三数据;第二电子设备检测到用户的第十二操作;响应于第十二操作,第二电子设备向第一电子设备发送第三数据。In a possible implementation, after the second electronic device displays the fifth identification in the first user interface, the method further includes: the second electronic device displays a sixth identification in the first user interface, and the sixth identification is The first application program is instructed to generate third data; the second electronic device detects the user's twelfth operation; and in response to the twelfth operation, the second electronic device sends the third data to the first electronic device.
在第二方面中,第一电子设备可以是电子设备100,第二电子设备可以是电子设备200,第一用户界面可以电子设备200的桌面,第一应用程序的图标可以是进行数据迁移的某一个应用程序的图标(例如图6C中所示的应用2的图标),第一数据可以是第一应用程序的数据,第一标识可以是指示发送第一数据的状态的标识(例如“待发送”、“发送中”等),第二标识可以是指示发送第一数据的进度的标识(例如进度条),第一操作可以是点击操作,第一消息可以是电子设备200在优先发送第一数据后向电子设备100发送的消息,第二操作可以是长按操作,第一选项可以是删除选项(例如图10B中的选项1011或图10C中的选项1021),第三操作可以是点击操作,第二消息是电子设备200在停止发送第一数据后向电子设备100发送的消息,第四操作可以是长按操作,第一窗口可以是图10K所示的窗口1060,第二选项可以是选项1061,第五操作可以是点击操作,第三消息可以是电子设备200在继续发送第一数据后向电子设备100发送的消息,第一文件夹可以是图9C所示的文件夹912,第二数据可以是第一文件夹中包括的一个或多个第二应用程序(例如应用3、应用4)的数据,第三标识可以是指示发送第二数据的状态的标识(例如“待发送”、“发送中”等),第四标识可以是指示发送第二数据的进度的标识(例如进度条),第六操作可以是点击操作,第四消息可以是电子设备200在优先发送第二数据后向电子设备100发送的消息,第七操作可以是长按操作,第三选项可以是删除选项(例如图11B中的选项1122),第八操作可以是点击操作,第五消息可以是电子设备200在停止发送第二数据后向电子设备100发送的消息,第九操作可以是长按操作,第二窗口可以是图11I所示的窗口1150,第四选项可以是选项1151,第十操作可以是点击操作,第六消息可以是电子设备200在继续发送第二数据后向电子设备100发送的消息,第一提示可以是显示在电子设备200上的图5A所示的提示条511,第二用户界面可以是图4E所示的界面,第三应用程序可以是手机克隆应用程序,第十一操作可以是返回桌面的操作,第一顺序可以是图4E所示的应用程序的图标的排列顺序,第五标识可以是图12A所示的标识1211,第六标识可以是图12C所示的标识1212,第三数据可以是用户使用应用程序后产生的新数据,第十二操作可以是指示电子设备200向电子设备100发送第三数据的操作(例如长按图12B所示的应用2的图标的操作和点击选项1221的操作)。In the second aspect, the first electronic device may be the electronic device 100, the second electronic device may be the electronic device 200, the first user interface may be the desktop of the electronic device 200, and the icon of the first application may be a program for data migration. An icon of an application program (for example, the icon of application 2 shown in FIG. 6C), the first data may be data of the first application program, and the first identification may be an identification indicating a status of sending the first data (for example, "to be sent"). ", "Sending", etc.), the second identification may be an identification indicating the progress of sending the first data (such as a progress bar), the first operation may be a click operation, and the first message may be that the electronic device 200 is sending the first data in priority. After the data is sent to the electronic device 100, the second operation may be a long press operation, the first option may be a delete option (for example, option 1011 in FIG. 10B or option 1021 in FIG. 10C), and the third operation may be a click operation. , the second message is a message sent by the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 100 after stopping sending the first data, the fourth operation may be a long press operation, the first window may be the window 1060 shown in FIG. 10K , and the second option may be Option 1061, the fifth operation may be a click operation, the third message may be a message sent by the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 100 after continuing to send the first data, and the first folder may be the folder 912 shown in FIG. 9C. The second data may be data of one or more second applications (for example, application 3, application 4) included in the first folder, and the third identification may be an identification indicating a status of sending the second data (for example, "to be sent" , "Sending", etc.), the fourth identification may be an identification indicating the progress of sending the second data (such as a progress bar), the sixth operation may be a click operation, and the fourth message may be that the electronic device 200 is sending the second data with priority. For the message sent to the electronic device 100, the seventh operation may be a long press operation, the third option may be a delete option (for example, option 1122 in FIG. 11B), the eighth operation may be a click operation, and the fifth message may be an electronic device 200 is a message sent to the electronic device 100 after stopping sending the second data, the ninth operation may be a long press operation, the second window may be the window 1150 shown in Figure 11I, the fourth option may be option 1151, and the tenth operation may is a click operation, the sixth message may be a message sent by the electronic device 200 to the electronic device 100 after continuing to send the second data, the first prompt may be the prompt bar 511 shown in FIG. 5A displayed on the electronic device 200, and the second The user interface may be the interface shown in Figure 4E, the third application may be a mobile phone cloning application, the eleventh operation may be an operation of returning to the desktop, and the first order may be the arrangement order of the application icons shown in Figure 4E , the fifth identification may be the identification 1211 shown in Figure 12A, the sixth identification may be the identification 1212 shown in Figure 12C, the third data may be new data generated after the user uses the application program, and the twelfth operation may be to indicate electronic The device 200 transmits the operation of the third data to the electronic device 100 (for example, the operation of long pressing the icon of the application 2 shown in FIG. 12B and the operation of clicking the option 1221).
第三方面,本申请实施例提供了一种电子设备,该电子设备包括一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器;其中,所述一个或多个存储器与所述一个或多个处理器耦合,所述一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令,当所述一个或多个处理器执行所述计算机指令时,使得所述电子设备执行上述第一方面或第二方面任一项可能的实现方式中所述的方法。In a third aspect, embodiments of the present application provide an electronic device, which includes one or more processors and one or more memories; wherein the one or more memories and the one or more processors Coupled, the one or more memories are used to store computer program codes, the computer program codes include computer instructions, and when the one or more processors execute the computer instructions, the electronic device performs the above-mentioned first step. The method described in any possible implementation manner of the aspect or the second aspect.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机存储介质,该计算机存储介质存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序包括程序指令,当所述程序指令在电子设备上运行时,使得所述电子设备执行上述第一方面或第二方面任一项可能的实现方式中所述的方法。In a fourth aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a computer storage medium that stores a computer program. The computer program includes program instructions. When the program instructions are run on an electronic device, the electronic device causes the electronic device to The method described in any possible implementation manner of the first aspect or the second aspect is executed.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机程序产品,当计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面或第二方面任一项可能的实现方式中所述的方法。In a fifth aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product. When the computer program product is run on a computer, it causes the computer to execute the method described in any of the possible implementations of the first aspect or the second aspect.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1A-图1F是本申请实施例提供的不同电子设备在数据迁移过程中显示的一组用户界面示意图;1A-1F are a set of schematic diagrams of user interfaces displayed by different electronic devices during the data migration process provided by embodiments of the present application;
图2是本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的示意图;Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图3A-图3H是本申请实施例提供的电子设备100与电子设备200建立通信连接过程中涉及的一组用户界面示意图; 3A-3H are a set of user interface schematic diagrams involved in the process of establishing a communication connection between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图4A-图4F是本申请实施例提供的用户选择需要迁移的数据、手动设置数据的迁移顺序过程中涉及的一组用户界面示意图;Figures 4A to 4F are schematic diagrams of a set of user interfaces involved in the process of users selecting data to be migrated and manually setting the migration sequence of data provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图5A-图5H是本申请实施例提供的电子设备100显示全局进度提示信息的过程中涉及的一组用户界面示意图;5A-5H are a set of user interface schematic diagrams involved in the process of displaying global progress prompt information by the electronic device 100 provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图6A-图6D是本申请实施例提供的电子设备100和电子设备200以“独立应用程序的粒度”来实时显示每一个应用程序的数据的迁移进度提示信息的过程中涉及的一组用户界面示意图;Figures 6A-6D are a set of user interfaces involved in the process of the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 provided by the embodiment of the present application displaying the migration progress prompt information of each application's data in real time at the "independent application granularity" schematic diagram;
图7A-图7H是本申请实施例提供的电子设备100和电子设备200以“文件夹的粒度”来实时显示该文件夹中包括的应用程序的数据的整体迁移进度提示信息的过程中涉及的一组用户界面示意图;7A to 7H are involved in the process in which the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 provided by the embodiment of the present application display the overall migration progress prompt information of the data of the application program included in the folder in real time at the "granularity of the folder". A set of user interface diagrams;
图8A-图8D是本申请实施例提供的电子设备100和电子设备200以“独立应用程序的粒度”来优先迁移应用程序的数据并显示相关提示信息的过程中涉及的一组用户界面示意图;8A to 8D are a set of user interface schematic diagrams involved in the process of preferentially migrating application data and displaying relevant prompt information at the "independent application granularity" of the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图9A-图9D是本申请实施例提供的电子设备100和电子设备200以“文件夹的粒度”来优先迁移该文件夹中包括的应用程序的数据并显示相关提示信息的过程中涉及的一组用户界面示意图;9A to 9D illustrate a process involved in the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 provided by the embodiment of the present application to preferentially migrate data of applications included in the folder at a "folder granularity" and display relevant prompt information. Schematic diagram of group user interface;
图10A-图10K是本申请实施例提供的电子设备100和电子设备200以“独立应用程序的粒度”来停止迁移应用程序的数据的过程中涉及的一组用户界面示意图;10A to 10K are a set of user interface schematic diagrams involved in the process of migrating data of an application program at the "independent application granularity" provided by the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 according to the embodiment of the present application;
图11A-图11I是本申请实施例提供的电子设备100和电子设备200以“文件夹的粒度”来停止迁移该文件夹中包括的应用程序的数据的过程中涉及的一组用户界面示意图;11A-11I are a set of user interface schematic diagrams involved in the process of stopping the migration of data of applications included in the folder at the "folder granularity" provided by the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图12A-图12F是本申请实施例提供的在“电子设备200上的某一个应用程序的数据向电子设备100发送完成,但是该应用程序的数据还未在电子设备100上克隆完成”的情况下,电子设备200显示相关提示信息的过程中涉及的一组用户界面示意图;Figures 12A to 12F illustrate the situation provided by the embodiment of the present application when "the data of a certain application program on the electronic device 200 has been sent to the electronic device 100, but the data of the application program has not been cloned on the electronic device 100." Below, a set of user interface schematic diagrams involved in the process of electronic device 200 displaying relevant prompt information;
图13是本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备100的软件架构示意图;Figure 13 is a schematic diagram of the software architecture of an electronic device 100 provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图14是本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备100的结构示意图。FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 100 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述。其中,在本申请实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“/”表示或的意思,例如,A/B可以表示A或B;文本中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况,另外,在本申请实施例的描述中,“多个”是指两个或多于两个。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be clearly and completely described below with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present application. Among them, in the description of the embodiments of this application, unless otherwise stated, "/" means or, for example, A/B can mean A or B; "and/or" in the text is only a way to describe related objects. The association relationship means that there can be three relationships. For example, A and/or B can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone. In addition, in the description of the embodiment of the present application , "plurality" means two or more than two.
应当理解,本申请的说明书和权利要求书及附图中的术语“第一”、“第二”等是用于区别不同对象,而不是用于描述特定顺序。此外,术语“包括”和“具有”以及它们任何变形,意图在于覆盖不排他的包含。例如包含了一系列步骤或单元的过程、方法、系统、产品或设备没有限定于已列出的步骤或单元,而是可选地还包括没有列出的步骤或单元,或可选地还包括对于这些过程、方法、产品或设备固有的其它步骤或单元。It should be understood that the terms "first", "second", etc. in the description, claims and drawings of this application are used to distinguish different objects, rather than describing a specific sequence. Furthermore, the terms "including" and "having" and any variations thereof are intended to cover non-exclusive inclusion. For example, a process, method, system, product or device that includes a series of steps or units is not limited to the listed steps or units, but optionally also includes steps or units that are not listed, or optionally also includes Other steps or units inherent to such processes, methods, products or devices.
在本申请中提及“实施例”意味着,结合实施例描述的特定特征、结构或特性可以包含在本申请的至少一个实施例中。在说明书中的各个位置出现该短语并不一定均是指相同的实施例,也不是与其它实施例互斥的独立的或备选的实施例。本领域技术人员显式地和隐式地理解的是,本申请所描述的实施例可以与其它实施例相结合。Reference in this application to "an embodiment" means that a particular feature, structure or characteristic described in connection with the embodiment may be included in at least one embodiment of the application. The appearances of this phrase in various places in the specification are not necessarily all referring to the same embodiment, nor are separate or alternative embodiments mutually exclusive of other embodiments. It will be explicitly and implicitly understood by those skilled in the art that the embodiments described herein may be combined with other embodiments.
本申请以下实施例中的术语“用户界面(user interface,UI)”,是应用程序或操作系统与用户之间进行交互和信息交换的介质接口,它实现信息的内部形式与用户可以接受形式之间的转换。用户界面是通过java、可扩展标记语言(extensible markup language,XML)等特定计算机语言编写的源代码,界面源代码在电子设备上经过解析,渲染,最终呈现为用户可以识别的内容。用户界面常用的表现形式是图形用户界面(graphic user interface,GUI),是指采用图形方式显示的与计算机操作相关的用户界面。它可以是在电子设备的显示屏中显示的文本、图标、按钮、菜单、选项卡、文本框、对话框、状态栏、导航栏、Widget等可视的界面元素。The term "user interface (UI)" in the following embodiments of this application is a media interface for interaction and information exchange between an application or operating system and a user. It realizes the difference between the internal form of information and the form acceptable to the user. conversion between. The user interface is source code written in specific computer languages such as Java and extensible markup language (XML). The interface source code is parsed and rendered on the electronic device, and finally presented as content that can be recognized by the user. The commonly used form of user interface is graphical user interface (GUI), which refers to a user interface related to computer operations that is displayed graphically. It can be text, icons, buttons, menus, tabs, text boxes, dialog boxes, status bars, navigation bars, widgets and other visual interface elements displayed on the display screen of an electronic device.
应用程序(Application,APP,可以简称为应用)备份技术用于生成应用程序的数据(例如应用程序的配置文件、用户数据等)的副本,在用户需要的时候,该副本可以用于恢复应用程序的数据,也可以用于将该应用程序的数据从一个电子设备导入到另一个电子设备上使用。如果用户在电子设备生成应用程序副本的过程中使用该应用程序,就可能导致数据备份失败,而且,在将应用程序的数据导入到另一个电子设备上的过程(也可以称为数据迁移过程,或,克隆过程)中,另一个电子设备需要加载这些数据,用户 需要等待所有数据导入并恢复完成才可以正常使用该电子设备,用户体验差。Application (APP, APP, can be referred to as application) backup technology is used to generate a copy of the application's data (such as the application's configuration file, user data, etc.), which can be used to restore the application when the user needs it. The data can also be used to import the data of the application from one electronic device to another electronic device for use. If the user uses the application while the electronic device is generating a copy of the application, it may cause the data backup to fail. Moreover, during the process of importing the application data to another electronic device (which may also be called the data migration process, Or, during the cloning process), another electronic device needs to load these data, the user You need to wait for all data to be imported and restored before you can use the electronic device normally, which results in a poor user experience.
在数据迁移过程中,不同设备厂商生产的电子设备显示的数据迁移的用户界面可能不相同。During the data migration process, electronic devices produced by different device manufacturers may display different data migration user interfaces.
参阅图1A-图1B,图1A-图1B示例性示出了设备厂商1生产的电子设备在数据迁移过程中的一组用户界面。Referring to FIGS. 1A and 1B , FIGS. 1A and 1B exemplarily illustrate a set of user interfaces of the electronic device produced by device manufacturer 1 during the data migration process.
参阅图1A,图1A示例性所示的用户界面为电子设备200(即发送数据的电子设备)在进行数据迁移过程中发送数据时显示的用户界面,可以看出,该用户界面中显示有提示用户不要退出该用户界面的相关信息(例如“请勿离开此页面”)。Referring to Figure 1A, the user interface shown in Figure 1A is a user interface displayed when the electronic device 200 (ie, the electronic device that sends data) sends data during the data migration process. It can be seen that a prompt is displayed in the user interface. Information about the user not to exit the user interface (e.g. "Do not leave this page").
类似地,参阅图1B,图1B示例性所示的用户界面为电子设备100(即接收数据的电子设备)在进行数据迁移过程中接收数据时显示的用户界面,可以看出,该用户界面中也显示有提示用户不要退出该用户界面的相关信息(例如“请勿离开此页面”)。Similarly, referring to FIG. 1B , the user interface shown exemplarily in FIG. 1B is a user interface displayed when the electronic device 100 (ie, the electronic device that receives data) receives data during the data migration process. It can be seen that in the user interface Relevant information that prompts the user not to exit the user interface (such as "Do not leave this page") is also displayed.
如果用户退出该用户界面,可能导致数据迁移过程中出现数据传输冲突等问题。If the user exits the user interface, problems such as data transmission conflicts may occur during data migration.
也即是说,在数据迁移过程中,为了防止数据迁移过程出现问题,设备厂商1生产的电子设备会在数据迁移的用户界面显示相关信息来提示用户不要退出该用户界面。That is to say, during the data migration process, in order to prevent problems during the data migration process, the electronic device produced by equipment manufacturer 1 will display relevant information on the user interface of the data migration to prompt the user not to exit the user interface.
参阅图1C-图1D,图1C-图1D示例性示出了设备厂商2生产的电子设备数据迁移过程中的一组用户界面。Referring to FIGS. 1C to 1D , FIGS. 1C to 1D exemplarily illustrate a set of user interfaces in the data migration process of the electronic device produced by device manufacturer 2.
参阅图1C,图1C示例性所示的用户界面为电子设备200(即发送数据的电子设备)在进行数据迁移过程中准备数据时显示的用户界面,如果用户退出此用户界面,则电子设备200会停止准备数据,即不会再继续进行数据迁移任务。Referring to FIG. 1C , the user interface illustrated in FIG. 1C is a user interface displayed by the electronic device 200 (ie, the electronic device that sends data) when preparing data during the data migration process. If the user exits this user interface, the electronic device 200 Data preparation will stop, that is, the data migration task will not continue.
类似地,参阅图1D,图1D示例性所示的用户界面为电子设备100(即接收数据的电子设备)在进行数据迁移过程中等待对方传输数据时显示的用户界面,如果用户退出此用户界面,或,用户点击图1D所示的“停止”选项,则电子设备100会停止等待对方传输数据,即不会继续进行数据迁移任务。Similarly, referring to FIG. 1D , the user interface shown exemplarily in FIG. 1D is a user interface displayed when the electronic device 100 (ie, the electronic device receiving data) is waiting for the other party to transmit data during the data migration process. If the user exits this user interface , or if the user clicks the "stop" option shown in Figure 1D, the electronic device 100 will stop waiting for the other party to transmit data, that is, it will not continue the data migration task.
也即是说,在数据迁移过程中,如果用户想要退出数据迁移的用户界面,去使用其他功能,那么,用户需要先停止数据迁移过程,才可以去使用其他功能。That is to say, during the data migration process, if the user wants to exit the data migration user interface and use other functions, then the user needs to stop the data migration process before he can use other functions.
参阅图1E-图1F,图1E-图1F示例性示出了设备厂商3生产的电子设备数据迁移过程中的一组用户界面。Referring to FIGS. 1E to 1F , FIGS. 1E to 1F exemplarily illustrate a set of user interfaces in the data migration process of the electronic device produced by device manufacturer 3.
参阅图1E,图1E示例性所示的用户界面为电子设备200(即发送数据的电子设备)在进行数据迁移过程中发送数据时显示的用户界面,如果用户退出此用户界面,或,用户点击图1E所示的“取消”选项,则电子设备200会停止发送数据,即不会再继续进行数据迁移任务。Referring to Figure 1E, the user interface illustrated in Figure 1E is a user interface displayed when the electronic device 200 (ie, the electronic device that sends data) sends data during the data migration process. If the user exits this user interface, or the user clicks With the “Cancel” option shown in FIG. 1E , the electronic device 200 will stop sending data, that is, it will not continue the data migration task.
类似地,参阅图1F,图1F示例性所示的用户界面为电子设备100(即接收数据的电子设备)在进行数据迁移过程中接收数据时显示的用户界面,如果用户退出此用户界面,或,用户点击图1F所示的“取消”选项,则电子设备100会停止接收数据,即不会继续进行数据迁移任务。Similarly, referring to FIG. 1F , the user interface exemplarily shown in FIG. 1F is a user interface displayed when the electronic device 100 (ie, the electronic device that receives data) receives data during the data migration process. If the user exits this user interface, or , the user clicks the "Cancel" option shown in Figure 1F, then the electronic device 100 will stop receiving data, that is, it will not continue the data migration task.
也即是说,与设备厂商2生产的电子设备类似,在数据迁移过程中,如果用户想要退出数据迁移的用户界面,去使用其他功能,那么,用户需要先停止数据迁移过程,才可以去使用其他功能。That is to say, similar to the electronic equipment produced by Equipment Manufacturer 2, during the data migration process, if the user wants to exit the data migration user interface and use other functions, then the user needs to stop the data migration process before he can go. Use other features.
从图1A-图1F可以看出,在数据迁移过程中,为了防止数据迁移失败,电子设备100和电子设备200均不支持用户退出数据迁移的用户界面,去使用其他功能。而且,即使用户强制退出数据迁移的用户界面,电子设备100和电子设备200的桌面上也不会显示任何的提示信息或动效信息来使得用户获知数据迁移的状态(例如,哪些应用程序处于数据传输状态或数据准备状态,不建议用户使用,哪些应用程序处于数据处理完成状态,用户可以使用),用户体验差。It can be seen from Figures 1A to 1F that during the data migration process, in order to prevent data migration failure, neither the electronic device 100 nor the electronic device 200 supports the user to exit the user interface of data migration to use other functions. Moreover, even if the user forcibly exits the user interface of the data migration, no prompt information or animation information will be displayed on the desktop of the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 to let the user know the status of the data migration (for example, which applications are in the data migration state). Transmission status or data preparation status, it is not recommended for users to use it, which applications are in the data processing completion status, users can use them), and the user experience is poor.
本申请实施例提供了一种交互方法及相关设备,在进行数据迁移的同时,电子设备100(即接收数据的电子设备)和电子设备200(即发送数据的电子设备)均可以支持用户退出数据迁移的用户界面,来使用其他功能,此外,电子设备100和电子设备200还可以在桌面上通过应用程序的图标显示应用程序的数据的传输状态信息(例如“发送中/接收中”、“待发送/待接收”、数据发送/接收的进度等信息),并且可以支持用户通过操作应用程序的图标来优先传输/停止传输该应用程序的数据,灵活便捷,提高用户体验。 Embodiments of the present application provide an interaction method and related devices. While performing data migration, both the electronic device 100 (that is, the electronic device that receives data) and the electronic device 200 (that is, the electronic device that sends data) can support users to exit data. The migrated user interface is used to use other functions. In addition, the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 can also display the transmission status information of the application data (such as "sending/receiving", "pending" through the application icon on the desktop). "Sending/to be received", the progress of data sending/receiving, etc.), and can support users to prioritize transmission/stop transmission of the application's data by operating the application's icon, which is flexible and convenient, and improves user experience.
下面,首先介绍本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统。Below, a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application is first introduced.
图2示例性示出了本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统。Figure 2 schematically shows a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
如图2所示,该通信系统可以包括:多个电子设备(也可以称为终端设备)。这多个电子设备可以包括:电子设备100、电子设备200。As shown in Figure 2, the communication system may include: multiple electronic devices (also called terminal devices). The plurality of electronic devices may include: electronic device 100 and electronic device 200 .
本申请实施例中对电子设备的数量不作限定。In the embodiments of this application, the number of electronic devices is not limited.
该通信系统中包括的多个电子设备均为智能终端设备,可以为各种类型,本申请实施例对该多个电子设备的具体类型不作限制。例如,该多个电子设备可以包括手机,还可以包括平板电脑、桌面型计算机、膝上型计算机、手持计算机、笔记本电脑、智慧屏、人工智能(Artificial Intelligence,AI)设备、车机等。The multiple electronic devices included in the communication system are all smart terminal devices and can be of various types. The embodiments of this application do not limit the specific types of the multiple electronic devices. For example, the plurality of electronic devices may include mobile phones, but may also include tablet computers, desktop computers, laptop computers, handheld computers, notebook computers, smart screens, artificial intelligence (Artificial Intelligence, AI) devices, car machines, etc.
在本申请实施例中,以电子设备100和电子设备200均是手机为例。其中,电子设备100可以是接收数据的电子设备(也可以称为目的电子设备,或,新设备,或,接收方),电子设备200可以是发送数据的电子设备(也可以称为源电子设备,或,旧设备,或,发送方)。In this embodiment of the present application, it is assumed that both the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 are mobile phones. The electronic device 100 may be an electronic device that receives data (also may be called a destination electronic device, or a new device, or a recipient), and the electronic device 200 may be an electronic device that sends data (may also be called a source electronic device). , or, old device, or, sender).
该通信系统中的多个电子设备之间可以登录相同的账号。例如,多个电子设备可以登录同一华为账号。账号可以是手机号,电子邮箱号,自定义的用户名,等等。Multiple electronic devices in the communication system can log in to the same account. For example, multiple electronic devices can log in to the same Huawei account. The account number can be a mobile phone number, email address, customized username, etc.
此外,该通信系统中的多个电子设备还可以结合下述任意几种方式来连接并通信:有线连接、无线连接例如蓝牙(bluetooth,BT)连接、无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)例如无线保真点对点(wireless fidelity point to point,Wi-Fi P2P)连接、近距离无线通信(near field communication,NFC)连接,红外技术(infrared,IR)连接等等,本申请实施例对此不作限定。In addition, multiple electronic devices in the communication system can also be connected and communicate in any of the following ways: wired connection, wireless connection such as Bluetooth (BT) connection, wireless local area networks (WLAN) such as Wireless fidelity point to point (Wi-Fi P2P) connection, near field communication (NFC) connection, infrared technology (infrared, IR) connection, etc., are not limited in the embodiments of this application .
该通信系统中的多个电子设备可以配置不同的软件操作系统(OperatingSystem,OS),包括但不限于等等。其中,为华为的鸿蒙系统。多个电子设备可以都配置相同的软件操作系统,例如可以均配置 Multiple electronic devices in the communication system can be configured with different software operating systems (OperatingSystem, OS), including but not limited to etc. in, For Huawei’s Hongmeng system. Multiple electronic devices can all be configured with the same software operating system, for example
在进行数据迁移之前,电子设备100(即接收数据的电子设备)和电子设备200(即发送数据的电子设备)之间需要建立通信连接。在成功建立通信连接之后,电子设备200才可以基于该通信连接向电子设备100发送数据,电子设备100才可以基于该通信连接接收电子设备200发送的数据,从而完成数据迁移。Before performing data migration, a communication connection needs to be established between the electronic device 100 (that is, the electronic device that receives data) and the electronic device 200 (that is, the electronic device that sends data). After the communication connection is successfully established, the electronic device 200 can send data to the electronic device 100 based on the communication connection, and the electronic device 100 can receive the data sent by the electronic device 200 based on the communication connection, thereby completing data migration.
下面结合图3A-图3H介绍电子设备100与电子设备200建立通信连接的一种可能的实现方式。A possible implementation method for establishing a communication connection between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 will be introduced below with reference to FIGS. 3A-3H.
图3A-图3H示例性示出了电子设备100与电子设备200建立通信连接过程中涉及的一系列用户界面。3A-3H exemplarily illustrate a series of user interfaces involved in the process of establishing a communication connection between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200.
首先,电子设备100作为接收数据的电子设备,可以创建一个WLAN,以支持电子设备200来连接该WLAN,从而使得电子设备100与电子设备200建立通信连接。First, as an electronic device that receives data, the electronic device 100 can create a WLAN to support the electronic device 200 to connect to the WLAN, so that the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 establish a communication connection.
参阅图3A,电子设备100可以显示用户界面310,该用户界面中可以包括选项311、选项312。Referring to FIG. 3A , the electronic device 100 can display a user interface 310 , which can include options 311 and 312 .
其中,选项311可以用于用户选择将电子设备100作为新设备(即接收数据的电子设备),选项312可以用于用户选择将电子设备100作为旧设备(即发送数据的电子设备)。Among them, option 311 can be used by the user to select the electronic device 100 as a new device (ie, an electronic device that receives data), and option 312 can be used by the user to select the electronic device 100 as an old device (ie, an electronic device that sends data).
其中,电子设备100可以是通过“手机克隆”应用程序进入用户界面310的,也可以是通过“设置”应用程序进入用户界面310的,本申请实施例对此不作限定。The electronic device 100 may enter the user interface 310 through the "Mobile Clone" application, or may enter the user interface 310 through the "Settings" application, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
在本申请实施例中,以电子设备100是新设备(即接收数据的电子设备)为例。In this embodiment of the present application, it is assumed that the electronic device 100 is a new device (that is, an electronic device that receives data).
继续参阅图3A,电子设备100可以检测到用户针对选项311的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100可以显示图3B示例性所示的用户界面320。Continuing to refer to FIG. 3A , the electronic device 100 may detect a user's operation (eg, a click operation) on option 311 , and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 320 exemplarily shown in FIG. 3B .
参阅图3B,用户界面320中可以包括选项321、选项322、选项323。该用户界面320可以用于用户选择旧设备(即发送数据的电子设备)类型。Referring to FIG. 3B , the user interface 320 may include options 321 , 322 , and 323 . The user interface 320 may be used by the user to select the type of legacy device (ie, the electronic device that sends the data).
其中,选项321可以用于用户选择旧设备类型为“华为”的电子设备,选项322可以用于用户选择旧设备类型为“其他安卓”的电子设备,选项323可以用于用户选择旧设备类型为“iPhone/iPad”的电子设备。Among them, option 321 can be used by the user to select an electronic device whose old device type is "Huawei", option 322 can be used by the user to select an electronic device whose old device type is "other Android", and option 323 can be used by the user to select an electronic device whose old device type is "Other Android". "iPhone/iPad" electronic device.
假设旧设备类型为“华为”,继续参阅图3B,电子设备100可以检测到用户针对选项321的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100可以显示图3C示例性所示的用户界面330。Assuming that the old device type is "Huawei", continuing to refer to FIG. 3B , the electronic device 100 can detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 321 , and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 can display the user's information as exemplarily shown in FIG. 3C Interface 330.
参阅图3C,用户界面330中可以包括二维码331。Referring to FIG. 3C, a QR code 331 may be included in the user interface 330.
其中,二维码331为电子设备100创建的WLAN对应的二维码,可以用于用户通过电子设备200来进行扫描,从而实现电子设备100与电子设备200建立通信连接。Among them, the QR code 331 is a QR code corresponding to the WLAN created by the electronic device 100, which can be used by the user to scan through the electronic device 200, thereby establishing a communication connection between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200.
继续参阅图3C,用户界面330中还可以包括电子设备100创建的WLAN对应的账号(例如XXXXXXXXXXCloudClone)、密码(例如XXXXXXXX),可以用于支持用户通过电子设备200手动连接该WLAN。 Continuing to refer to FIG. 3C , the user interface 330 may also include the account (for example, XXXXXXXXXXCloudClone) and password (for example, XXXXXXXX) corresponding to the WLAN created by the electronic device 100, which may be used to support the user to manually connect to the WLAN through the electronic device 200.
电子设备100创建完成WLAN之后,电子设备200可以扫描该WLAN对应的二维码,扫描并识别成功之后,则电子设备100与电子设备200建立通信连接。After the electronic device 100 completes creating the WLAN, the electronic device 200 can scan the QR code corresponding to the WLAN. After the scanning and recognition are successful, the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 establish a communication connection.
参阅图3D,电子设备200可以显示用户界面340,该用户界面中可以包括选项341、选项342。Referring to FIG. 3D , the electronic device 200 can display a user interface 340 , which can include options 341 and 342 .
其中,选项341可以用于用户选择将电子设备200作为新设备(即接收数据的电子设备),选项342可以用于用户选择将电子设备200作为旧设备(即发送数据的电子设备)。Among them, option 341 can be used by the user to select the electronic device 200 as a new device (ie, an electronic device that receives data), and option 342 can be used by the user to select the electronic device 200 as an old device (ie, an electronic device that sends data).
其中,电子设备200可以是通过“手机克隆”应用程序进入用户界面340的,也可以是通过“设置”应用程序进入用户界面340的,本申请实施例对此不作限定。The electronic device 200 may enter the user interface 340 through the "Mobile Clone" application, or may enter the user interface 340 through the "Settings" application, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
在本申请实施例中,以电子设备200是新设备(即发送数据的电子设备)为例。In this embodiment of the present application, it is assumed that the electronic device 200 is a new device (that is, an electronic device that sends data).
继续参阅图3D,电子设备200可以检测到用户针对选项342的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备200可以显示图3E示例性所示的用户界面350。Continuing to refer to FIG. 3D , the electronic device 200 may detect a user's operation (eg, a click operation) on option 342 , and in response to the operation, the electronic device 200 may display the user interface 350 exemplarily shown in FIG. 3E .
参阅图3E,用户界面350为扫码界面,可以用于支持用户扫描电子设备100创建的WLAN对应的二维码(例如图3C所示的二维码331),在用户通过扫码框成功扫描到上述二维码之后,电子设备200可以在图3F示例性所示的扫码框中显示上述二维码的图像。电子设备200在成功识别上述二维码之后,电子设备200可以显示图3G示例性所示的用户界面360,该用户界面360可以用于提示电子设备200正在与新设备(即电子设备200)建立通信连接。Referring to Figure 3E, the user interface 350 is a code scanning interface, which can be used to support the user to scan the QR code corresponding to the WLAN created by the electronic device 100 (such as the QR code 331 shown in Figure 3C). After the user successfully scans the code through the code scanning box, After receiving the above QR code, the electronic device 200 can display the image of the above QR code in the code scanning box shown as an example in FIG. 3F . After the electronic device 200 successfully recognizes the above QR code, the electronic device 200 can display the user interface 360 as exemplarily shown in FIG. 3G . The user interface 360 can be used to prompt that the electronic device 200 is establishing a connection with a new device (ie, the electronic device 200 ). Communication connection.
在成功建立通信连接之后,电子设备200可以显示用于用户选择迁移数据的用户界面(例如下述图4A示例性所示的用户界面)。同时,电子设备100可以显示图3H示例性所示的用户界面370,该用户界面可以用于提示用户电子设备100与旧设备(即电子设备200)成功建立通信连接,并且可以用于提示用户可以在旧设备上选择需要迁移的数据。After the communication connection is successfully established, the electronic device 200 may display a user interface for the user to select migration data (for example, the user interface illustrated in FIG. 4A below). At the same time, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 370 exemplarily shown in FIG. 3H , which may be used to prompt the user that the electronic device 100 successfully establishes a communication connection with the old device (ie, the electronic device 200 ), and may be used to prompt the user that the communication connection can be successfully established. Select the data that needs to be migrated on the old device.
电子设备100与电子设备200成功建立通信连接之后,电子设备200可以显示用于用户选择迁移数据的用户界面,用户可以在该用户界面中手动选择需要迁移的数据。此外,用户还可以在该用户界面中手动设置数据的迁移顺序(也可以称为克隆顺序)。After the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 successfully establish a communication connection, the electronic device 200 can display a user interface for the user to select data to be migrated, and the user can manually select data that needs to be migrated in the user interface. In addition, users can also manually set the data migration order (also called cloning order) in this user interface.
下面结合图4A-图4F介绍用户选择迁移数据、手动设置数据的迁移顺序的可能的实现方式。The following describes a possible implementation method in which the user selects data to be migrated and manually sets the data migration sequence with reference to Figures 4A to 4F.
图4A-图4F示例性示出了用户选择需要迁移的数据、手动设置数据的迁移顺序过程中涉及的一系列用户界面。Figures 4A to 4F exemplarily illustrate a series of user interfaces involved in the process of the user selecting data that needs to be migrated and manually setting the migration sequence of the data.
参阅图4A,在电子设备100与电子设备200成功建立通信连接之后,电子设备200可以显示图4A示例性所示的用户界面410,该用户界面可以为用于用户选择需要迁移的数据的用户界面。Referring to Figure 4A, after the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 successfully establish a communication connection, the electronic device 200 can display the user interface 410 exemplarily shown in Figure 4A. The user interface can be a user interface for the user to select data that needs to be migrated. .
用户界面410中可以包括一个或多个应用程序的数据对应的选项(例如选项412、选项413、选项414、选项415、选项416、选项417等等),可以用于用户选择需要迁移哪个/哪些应用程序的数据。The user interface 410 may include options corresponding to the data of one or more applications (such as option 412, option 413, option 414, option 415, option 416, option 417, etc.), which may be used by the user to select which/which ones need to be migrated. Application data.
其中,选项412为“联系人”应用程序的数据对应的选项,选项413为“信息”应用程序的数据对应的选项,选项414为“通话记录”应用程序的数据对应的选项,选项415为“日程”应用程序的数据对应的选项,选项416为“图库”应用程序的数据对应的选项,选项417为“录音”应用程序的数据对应的选项。Among them, option 412 is the option corresponding to the data of the "Contacts" application, option 413 is the option corresponding to the data of the "Message" application, option 414 is the option corresponding to the data of the "Call Records" application, and option 415 is " The option 416 is the option corresponding to the data of the "Schedule" application, the option 416 is the option corresponding to the data of the "Gallery" application, and the option 417 is the option corresponding to the data of the "Recording" application.
从图4A中可以看出,选项417被灰度化,即处于不可选状态,也即是说,在新设备不支持导入某个应用程序的数据的情况下,用户无法选择该应用程序的数据来进行数据迁移。可选地,选项417也可以不显示,也即是说,在新设备不支持导入某个应用程序的数据的情况下,电子设备200也可以不显示该应用程序的数据对应的选项。As can be seen from Figure 4A, option 417 is grayed out, that is, in an unselectable state. That is to say, if the new device does not support importing the data of a certain application, the user cannot select the data of the application. to perform data migration. Optionally, option 417 may not be displayed. That is to say, if the new device does not support importing data of a certain application program, the electronic device 200 may not display options corresponding to the data of the application program.
用户界面410中还可以包括选项411(即“全选”选项),可以用于用户一键选择全部可进行迁移的应用程序的数据。The user interface 410 may also include an option 411 (ie, a "select all" option), which can be used by the user to select data of all applications that can be migrated with one click.
用户界面410中还可以包括选项418(即“开始迁移”选项),可以用于用户在选择完成需要迁移的数据之后开始进行数据迁移。可以看出,在用户没有开始选择需要迁移的数据的时候,选项418被灰度化,即处于不可选状态。The user interface 410 may also include an option 418 (ie, a "start migration" option), which may be used by the user to start data migration after selecting the data that needs to be migrated. It can be seen that when the user does not start to select the data that needs to be migrated, option 418 is grayed out, that is, it is in an unselectable state.
可以理解,电子设备200还可以支持用户通过上滑操作来查看或选择更多应用程序的数据对应的选项。 It can be understood that the electronic device 200 can also support the user to view or select more options corresponding to the data of the application program through an upward sliding operation.
继续参阅图4A,电子设备200可以支持用户通过操作选项411来一键选择全部可进行迁移的应用程序的数据,也可以支持用户通过逐个操作每个应用程序的数据对应的选项来选择需要迁移的应用程序的数据。以用户通过操作选项411来一键选择全部可进行迁移的应用程序的数据为例,电子设备200可以检测到用户针对选项411的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备200可以选择全部可进行迁移的应用程序的数据。Continuing to refer to FIG. 4A , the electronic device 200 can support the user to select the data of all applications that can be migrated with one click by operating option 411, or can also support the user to select the data that needs to be migrated by operating the options corresponding to the data of each application one by one. Application data. Taking the user's one-click operation of option 411 to select data of all applications that can be migrated as an example, the electronic device 200 can detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 411, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 200 can select Data for all applications that can be migrated.
参阅图4B,从图4B中可以看出,全部可进行迁移的应用程序的数据对应的选择框中都显示有一个选中标识(例如“√”标识),用于提示用户已经完成选择全部可进行迁移的应用程序的数据。由于已经完成选择需要迁移的数据,“开始迁移”选项也由“不可选状态”变为了“可选状态”。Referring to Figure 4B, it can be seen from Figure 4B that a selection mark (such as a "√" mark) is displayed in the selection box corresponding to the data of all applications that can be migrated, which is used to prompt the user that the selection has been completed and that all the data can be migrated. Migrated application data. Since the selection of data to be migrated has been completed, the "Start Migration" option has also changed from "unselectable status" to "optional status".
在本申请实施例中,电子设备200显示的上述一个或多个应用程序的数据对应的选项的排列顺序可以表示应用程序的数据的迁移顺序,排列位置靠前,则优先迁移该应用程序的数据。In this embodiment of the present application, the arrangement order of the options corresponding to the data of one or more applications displayed by the electronic device 200 can represent the migration order of the application data. If the arrangement position is higher, the data of the application program will be migrated first. .
其中,该排列顺序可以是电子设备200的系统预设的排列顺序,也可以是电子设备200通过学习用户的使用习惯来设置的排列顺序。例如,电子设备200可以统计最近一段时间内用户使用各个应用程序的频率,然后,按照用户的使用频率来排列各个应用程序的数据对应的选项,使用频率越高,排列顺序越靠前,迁移顺序也就越靠前。这样,可以优先迁移用户使用频率较高的应用程序的数据,从而使得该应用程序的数据更早地完成迁移,以便用户可以更早地使用该应用程序,提高用户体验。The arrangement order may be an arrangement order preset by the system of the electronic device 200 , or may be an arrangement order set by the electronic device 200 by learning the user's usage habits. For example, the electronic device 200 can count the frequency with which users use each application in a recent period of time, and then arrange the options corresponding to the data of each application according to the user's frequency of use. The higher the frequency of use, the higher the ranking order, and the migration order. It's also closer to the front. In this way, the data of applications that users use more frequently can be migrated first, so that the data of this application can be migrated earlier, so that users can use the application earlier and improve the user experience.
从图4B中(或图4A中)容易看出,各个应用程序的数据的迁移顺序依次为:“联系人”应用程序的数据、“信息”应用程序的数据、“通话记录”应用程序的数据、“日程”应用程序的数据、“图库”应用程序的数据。It is easy to see from Figure 4B (or Figure 4A) that the order of data migration of each application is: data of the "Contacts" application, data of the "Message" application, and data of the "Call Records" application. , "Schedule" application data, "Gallery" application data.
在本申请实施例中,电子设备200还可以支持用户通过手动设置来调整上述一个或多个应用程序的数据对应的选项的排列顺序,从而改变上述一个或多个应用程序的数据的迁移顺序,例如,可以支持用户通过拖动操作来调整上述一个或多个应用程序的数据对应的选项的排列顺序。In this embodiment of the present application, the electronic device 200 can also support the user to adjust the order of options corresponding to the data of the one or more applications through manual settings, thereby changing the migration order of the data of the one or more applications. For example, the user can be supported to adjust the order of options corresponding to the data of one or more of the above applications through dragging operations.
参阅图4B,假设用户想要优先迁移“图库”应用程序的数据,则用户可以将“图库”应用程序的数据对应的选项调整到最前面(即排列顺序位于第一个)。Referring to Figure 4B, assuming that the user wants to migrate the data of the "Gallery" application first, the user can adjust the options corresponding to the data of the "Gallery" application to the front (that is, the sort order is at the first).
示例性地,电子设备200可以检测到用户针对“图库”应用程序的数据对应的选项的操作(例如长按并向上拖动“图库”应用程序的数据对应的选项至“联系人”应用程序的数据对应的选项之前的操作),响应于该操作,电子设备200可以显示图4C示例性所示的用户界面,可以看出,在该用户界面中,“图库”应用程序的数据对应的选项被调整到了最前面,从而在数据迁移开始后,可以优先迁移“图库”应用程序的数据。For example, the electronic device 200 may detect the user's operation on the option corresponding to the data of the "Gallery" application (for example, long press and drag upward the option corresponding to the data of the "Gallery" application to the "Contacts" application). The operation before the option corresponding to the data), in response to the operation, the electronic device 200 can display the user interface shown in FIG. 4C. It can be seen that in the user interface, the option corresponding to the data of the "Gallery" application is It has been adjusted to the front so that the data of the "Gallery" application can be migrated first after the data migration starts.
容易理解,上述仅仅以将“图库”应用程序的数据对应的选项调整到最前面为例,不限于此,通过“长按并向上拖动”可以将“图库”应用程序的数据对应的选项调整到其原位置之前的任意位置(例如“日程”应用程序的数据对应的选项之前、“通话记录”应用程序的数据对应的选项之前、“信息”应用程序的数据对应的选项之前)。It is easy to understand that the above is just an example of adjusting the options corresponding to the data of the "Gallery" application to the front. It is not limited to this. You can adjust the options corresponding to the data of the "Gallery" application by "long pressing and dragging upward". to any position before its original location (for example, before the option corresponding to the data of the "Schedule" application, before the option corresponding to the data of the "Call History" application, before the option corresponding to the data of the "Messages" application).
上述图4B介绍的是用户将应用程序的数据对应的选项的顺序向前调整的过程,类似地,电子设备200还可以支持用户将应用程序的数据对应的选项的顺序向后调整。The above-mentioned FIG. 4B describes the process of the user adjusting the order of options corresponding to the data of the application program forward. Similarly, the electronic device 200 can also support the user to adjust the order of options corresponding to the data of the application program backward.
参阅图4C,容易理解,当前各个应用程序的数据的迁移顺序依次为:“图库”应用程序的数据、“联系人”应用程序的数据、“信息”应用程序的数据、“通话记录”应用程序的数据、“日程”应用程序的数据。Referring to Figure 4C, it is easy to understand that the current migration order of data of each application is: data of the "Gallery" application, data of the "Contacts" application, data of the "Message" application, and "Call Records" application. data, data from the Schedule application.
假设用户想要优先迁移“联系人”应用程序的数据,则用户可以将“图库”应用程序的数据对应的选项调整到“联系人”应用程序的数据对应的选项的后面。Assuming that the user wants to migrate the data of the "Contacts" application first, the user can adjust the options corresponding to the data of the "Gallery" application to the back of the options corresponding to the data of the "Contacts" application.
继续参阅图4C,示例性地,电子设备200可以检测到用户针对“图库”应用程序的数据对应的选项的操作(例如长按并向下拖动“图库”应用程序的数据对应的选项至“联系人”应用程序的数据对应的选项之后的操作),响应于该操作,电子设备200可以显示图4D示例性所示的用户界面,可以看出,在该用户界面中,“图库”应用程序的数据对应的选项被调整到了“联系人”应用程序的数据对应的选项之后,即“联系人”应用程序的数据对应的选项被调整到了最前面,从而在数据迁移开始后,可以优先迁移“联系人”应用程序的数据。Continuing to refer to FIG. 4C , for example, the electronic device 200 can detect the user's operation on the option corresponding to the data of the "Gallery" application (for example, long press and drag downward the option corresponding to the data of the "Gallery" application to " The operation after the option corresponding to the data of the "Contacts" application), in response to this operation, the electronic device 200 can display the user interface shown in FIG. 4D. It can be seen that in this user interface, the "Gallery" application After the options corresponding to the data of the "Contacts" application are adjusted to the options corresponding to the data of the "Contacts" application, that is, the options corresponding to the data of the "Contacts" application are adjusted to the front, so that after the data migration starts, the migration can be prioritized." Contacts application data.
容易理解,在图4C中,用户也可以通过长按并向上拖动“联系人”应用程序的数据对应的选项至“图 库”应用程序的数据对应的选项之前来将“联系人”应用程序的数据对应的选项调整到最前面。It is easy to understand that in Figure 4C, the user can also long press and drag upward the option corresponding to the data of the "Contacts" application to the "Picture Adjust the options corresponding to the data of the "Contacts" application to the front.
参阅图4D,容易理解,当前各个应用程序的数据的迁移顺序依次为:“联系人”应用程序的数据、“图库”应用程序的数据、“信息”应用程序的数据、“通话记录”应用程序的数据、“日程”应用程序的数据。Referring to Figure 4D, it is easy to understand that the current migration order of data of each application is: data of the "Contacts" application, data of the "Gallery" application, data of the "Message" application, and "Call Records" application data, data from the Schedule application.
继续参阅图4D,在完成选择需要迁移的数据,并确定好数据的迁移顺序之后,可以开始进行数据迁移。示例性地,电子设备200可以检测到用户针对图4D所示的“开始迁移”选项的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备200可以开始进行数据迁移(即对数据进行打包、打包完成后向电子设备100发送)。Continuing to refer to Figure 4D, after selecting the data to be migrated and determining the order of data migration, data migration can begin. For example, the electronic device 200 can detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on the "Start Migration" option shown in FIG. 4D, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 200 can start data migration (ie, package the data, After the packaging is completed, it is sent to the electronic device 100).
进一步地,电子设备200可以开始显示数据发送过程的用户界面,电子设备100可以开始显示数据接收过程的用户界面。Further, the electronic device 200 may start to display the user interface of the data sending process, and the electronic device 100 may start to display the user interface of the data receiving process.
参阅图4E,图4E示例性示出了电子设备200进行数据发送过程中(即用户触发电子设备200进行数据迁移之后)的一个用户界面。该用户界面可以包括电子设备200进行数据发送过程的一些相关信息,例如,已发送数据的总量(例如“已发送5MB”)、已发送数据的百分比(例如“20%”)、数据发送的速率(例如“130MB/秒”)、完成数据发送的剩余时间(例如“15分钟”)、每一个应用程序的数据的发送状态(例如“已完成”、“正在发送”、“等待发送”),等等。Referring to FIG. 4E , FIG. 4E exemplarily shows a user interface during the process of data transmission by the electronic device 200 (that is, after the user triggers the electronic device 200 to perform data migration). The user interface may include some relevant information about the data sending process performed by the electronic device 200, such as the total amount of data sent (such as “5MB sent”), the percentage of data sent (such as “20%”), the number of data sent. rate (such as "130MB/second"), the remaining time to complete the data sending (such as "15 minutes"), the data sending status of each application (such as "completed", "sending", "waiting to send") ,etc.
参阅图4F,图4F示例性示出了电子设备100进行数据接收过程中(即用户触发电子设备200进行数据迁移之后)的一个用户界面。该用户界面可以包括电子设备100进行数据接收过程的一些相关信息,例如,已接收数据的总量(例如“已接收5MB”)、已接收数据的百分比(例如“20%”)、数据接收的速率(例如“130MB/秒”)、完成数据接收的剩余时间(例如“15分钟”)、每一个应用程序的数据的接收状态(例如“已完成”、“正在接收”、“等待接收”),等等。Referring to FIG. 4F , FIG. 4F exemplarily shows a user interface during the data receiving process of the electronic device 100 (that is, after the user triggers the electronic device 200 to perform data migration). The user interface may include some relevant information about the data receiving process performed by the electronic device 100, such as the total amount of data received (such as “5MB received”), the percentage of data received (such as “20%”), the number of data received. rate (such as "130MB/second"), the remaining time to complete data reception (such as "15 minutes"), the data reception status of each application (such as "completed", "receiving", "waiting to receive") ,etc.
在本申请实施例中,通过使用相关技术(例如对数据打包发送和数据接收加载过程的异步化和快照技术),在数据迁移过程中,电子设备100和电子设备200均可以支持用户从数据传输界面(例如图4E和图4F示例性所示的用户界面)切换出去(例如切换到桌面),去使用电子设备的其他功能,不影响用户的使用。In the embodiment of the present application, by using related technologies (such as asynchronous and snapshot technology for data packaging and sending and data receiving and loading processes), during the data migration process, both the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 can support the user from data transmission. The interface (such as the user interface schematically shown in FIG. 4E and FIG. 4F ) is switched out (for example, switched to the desktop) to use other functions of the electronic device without affecting the user's use.
用户在数据传输界面切换出去之后,为了便于用户获知数据迁移过程的全局进度信息,电子设备100和电子设备200均可以显示全局进度提示信息。After the user switches out of the data transfer interface, in order to facilitate the user to know the global progress information of the data migration process, both the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 can display global progress prompt information.
下面结合图5A-图5H介绍电子设备100显示全局进度提示信息的可能的实现方式。A possible implementation method for the electronic device 100 to display global progress prompt information will be introduced below with reference to FIGS. 5A to 5H .
图5A-图5H示例性示出了电子设备100显示全局进度提示信息的过程中涉及的一系列用户界面。5A-5H exemplarily illustrate a series of user interfaces involved in the process of the electronic device 100 displaying global progress prompt information.
以用户从数据传输界面切换到桌面为例,参阅图5A,图5A示例性所示的用户界面510可以是电子设备100的“桌面”应用程序的一个用户界面(也可以称为桌面),用户界面510中可以包括提示条511,该提示条511上可以显示有相关提示信息(例如“克隆中,请保持设备靠近”),用于提示用户电子设备正在进行数据迁移(也可以称为数据克隆),请用户保持设备靠近,从而保持更高的信号强度,以便更快地完成数据迁移任务。Take the user switching from the data transmission interface to the desktop as an example. Refer to FIG. 5A . The user interface 510 shown in FIG. The interface 510 may include a prompt bar 511, which may display relevant prompt information (such as "cloning, please keep the device close") to prompt the user that the electronic device is undergoing data migration (which may also be called data cloning). ), users are asked to keep their devices close to maintain higher signal strength for faster data migration tasks.
在一些示例中,电子设备100可以基于电子设备100与电子设备200之间的距离远近,或,通信连接的信号强弱来自动调整提示条511的可见程度或明显程度。In some examples, the electronic device 100 can automatically adjust the visibility or conspicuousness of the prompt bar 511 based on the distance between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 or the signal strength of the communication connection.
示例性地,在电子设备100与电子设备200之间的距离小于某一个距离阈值时,或,通信连接的信号强度高于某一个强度阈值时,电子设备100可以将提示条511调整为比图5A中颜色更淡,透明度更高的提示条(例如图5B中示例性所示的颜色淡化且透明度更高的提示条),或者,可以将提示条511的尺寸调整为比图5A中尺寸更小一点的提示条,这样,可以减少提示条对桌面内容的遮挡。For example, when the distance between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 is less than a certain distance threshold, or when the signal strength of the communication connection is higher than a certain strength threshold, the electronic device 100 can adjust the prompt bar 511 to be larger than the figure. 5A, a lighter color and a higher transparency prompt bar (such as the faded color and higher transparency prompt bar shown in FIG. 5B), or the size of the prompt bar 511 can be adjusted to be larger than the size in FIG. 5A. A smaller prompt bar can reduce the obstruction of the desktop content by the prompt bar.
在另一些示例中,电子设备100可以支持提示条的隐藏显示功能。In other examples, the electronic device 100 may support a hidden display function of the prompt bar.
示例性地,参阅图5C,提示条511上可以显示有选项512,选项512可以用于隐藏显示提示条(即取消显示提示条)。电子设备100可以检测到用户针对选项512的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100可以隐藏显示提示条511。这样,在隐藏显示提示条511之后,桌面内容就不会被遮挡了,同时给予了用户选择权,可以让用户自主选择是否显示提示条511。For example, referring to FIG. 5C , an option 512 may be displayed on the prompt bar 511 , and the option 512 may be used to hide and display the prompt bar (ie, cancel the display of the prompt bar). The electronic device 100 may detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 512, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may hide and display the prompt bar 511. In this way, after hiding and displaying the prompt bar 511, the desktop content will not be blocked, and at the same time, the user is given the right to choose whether to display the prompt bar 511.
可选地,在隐藏显示提示条511之后,为了防止数据迁移失败,在电子设备100与电子设备200之间的距离大于某一个距离阈值时,或,通信连接的信号强度低于某一个强度阈值时,电子设备100可以自动 重新显示提示条511,以提示用户将电子设备100和电子设备200靠近放置,从而保持更高的信号强度,以便成功完成数据迁移任务。Optionally, after hiding the display prompt bar 511, in order to prevent data migration failure, when the distance between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 is greater than a certain distance threshold, or the signal strength of the communication connection is lower than a certain strength threshold. When, the electronic device 100 can automatically The prompt bar 511 is redisplayed to prompt the user to place the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 close to each other to maintain higher signal strength in order to successfully complete the data migration task.
在另一些示例中,提示条511可以显示在除桌面之外的其他用户界面上,例如,提示条511可以显示在图5D示例性所示的通知栏对应的用户界面中。In other examples, the prompt bar 511 may be displayed on a user interface other than the desktop. For example, the prompt bar 511 may be displayed on a user interface corresponding to the notification bar as exemplarily shown in FIG. 5D .
提示条511在上述通知栏对应的用户界面中显示时,电子设备100也可以支持提示条的隐藏显示功能。When the prompt bar 511 is displayed in the user interface corresponding to the notification bar, the electronic device 100 may also support a hidden display function of the prompt bar.
示例性地,参阅图5D,电子设备100可以检测到用户针对提示条511的操作(例如左滑操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100可以显示图5E示例性所示的选项513,选项513可以用于隐藏显示提示条511。进一步地,电子设备100可以检测到用户针对选项513的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100可以隐藏显示提示条511。这样,给予了用户选择权,可以让用户自主选择是否显示提示条511。For example, referring to FIG. 5D , the electronic device 100 can detect the user's operation (such as a left sliding operation) on the prompt bar 511 , and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 can display the option 513 exemplarily shown in FIG. 5E . The option 513 Can be used to hide the display prompt bar 511. Further, the electronic device 100 may detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 513, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may hide and display the prompt bar 511. In this way, the user is given the right to choose, allowing the user to independently choose whether to display the prompt bar 511.
可选地,在隐藏显示提示条511之后,为了防止数据迁移失败,在电子设备100与电子设备200之间的距离大于某一个距离阈值时,或,通信连接的信号强度低于某一个强度阈值时,电子设备100可以自动重新显示提示条511,以提示用户将电子设备100和电子设备200靠近放置,从而保持更高的信号强度,以便成功完成数据迁移任务。Optionally, after hiding the display prompt bar 511, in order to prevent data migration failure, when the distance between the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 is greater than a certain distance threshold, or the signal strength of the communication connection is lower than a certain strength threshold. , the electronic device 100 can automatically redisplay the prompt bar 511 to prompt the user to place the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 close to each other to maintain higher signal strength in order to successfully complete the data migration task.
在完成数据迁移之后,电子设备100也可以显示相关提示信息,以提示用户数据迁移完成。After the data migration is completed, the electronic device 100 may also display relevant prompt information to prompt the user that the data migration is completed.
示例性地,参阅图5F,在完成数据迁移之后,电子设备100可以显示提示条514,该提示条514上可以显示有相关提示信息(例如“克隆完成”),用于提示用户已完成数据迁移。For example, referring to FIG. 5F , after data migration is completed, the electronic device 100 may display a prompt bar 514 , and the prompt bar 514 may display relevant prompt information (such as “Clone Complete”) to prompt the user that the data migration has been completed. .
该提示条514上还可以显示有选项515,选项515可以用于隐藏显示提示条514。电子设备100可以检测到用户针对选项515的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100可以隐藏显示提示条514。这样,给予了用户选择权,可以让用户自主选择是否显示提示条514。The prompt bar 514 may also display an option 515, and the option 515 may be used to hide and display the prompt bar 514. The electronic device 100 may detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 515, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may hide and display the prompt bar 514. In this way, the user is given the right to choose, allowing the user to independently choose whether to display the prompt bar 514.
在一些示例中,电子设备100显示提示条514的时长可以为预设时长(例如“10s”),在预设时长之后,电子设备100可以自动隐藏显示提示条514。这样,无需用户手动操作来隐藏显示提示条514,简化用户操作。In some examples, the electronic device 100 may display the prompt bar 514 for a preset time period (for example, “10s”). After the preset time period, the electronic device 100 may automatically hide the display prompt bar 514 . In this way, the user does not need to manually operate to hide the display prompt bar 514, simplifying the user operation.
可选地,提示条514上还可以显示有上述预设时长的倒计时,倒计时结束之后,电子设备100可以自动隐藏显示提示条514。Optionally, the prompt bar 514 may also display a countdown of the preset duration. After the countdown ends, the electronic device 100 may automatically hide and display the prompt bar 514 .
在另一些示例中,提示条514可以显示在除桌面之外的其他用户界面上,例如,提示条514可以显示在图5G示例性所示的通知栏对应的用户界面中。In other examples, the prompt bar 514 may be displayed on a user interface other than the desktop. For example, the prompt bar 514 may be displayed on a user interface corresponding to the notification bar as exemplarily shown in FIG. 5G .
提示条514在上述通知栏对应的用户界面中显示时,电子设备100也可以支持提示条的隐藏显示功能。When the prompt bar 514 is displayed in the user interface corresponding to the notification bar, the electronic device 100 may also support a hidden display function of the prompt bar.
示例性地,参阅图5G,电子设备100可以检测到用户针对提示条514的操作(例如左滑操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100可以显示图5H示例性所示的选项516,选项516可以用于隐藏显示提示条514。进一步地,电子设备100可以检测到用户针对选项516的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100可以隐藏显示提示条514。这样,给予了用户选择权,可以让用户自主选择是否显示提示条514。For example, referring to FIG. 5G , the electronic device 100 can detect the user's operation (such as a left sliding operation) on the prompt bar 514 , and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 can display the option 516 exemplarily shown in FIG. 5H . The option 516 Can be used to hide the display prompt bar 514. Further, the electronic device 100 may detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 516, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may hide and display the prompt bar 514. In this way, the user is given the right to choose, allowing the user to independently choose whether to display the prompt bar 514.
上述图5A-图5H仅仅是以电子设备100为例对电子设备显示全局进度提示信息的过程进行说明的,容易理解,电子设备200显示全局进度提示信息的过程与电子设备100类似,可以参照上述图5A-图5H的相关内容,在此不再赘述。The above-mentioned FIGS. 5A to 5H only take the electronic device 100 as an example to illustrate the process of the electronic device displaying the global progress prompt information. It is easy to understand that the process of the electronic device 200 displaying the global progress prompt information is similar to the electronic device 100 . You can refer to the above The relevant contents of Figure 5A to Figure 5H will not be described again here.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例对上述提示条511和提示条514的显示形式(例如形状、尺寸、颜色、透明度、显示位置、提示条上的文字等)不作限定。例如,本申请实施例中以提示条511上的文字是“克隆中,请保持设备靠近”为例,不限于此,也可以是其他用于提示用户电子设备正在进行数据迁移的相关文字/符号,和/或,用于提示用户保持两个设备靠近放置的相关文字/符号。It should be noted that the embodiment of the present application does not limit the display form (such as shape, size, color, transparency, display position, text on the prompt bar, etc.) of the above prompt bar 511 and prompt bar 514. For example, in the embodiment of this application, the text on the prompt bar 511 is "Cloning, please keep the device close" as an example. It is not limited to this, and it can also be other related text/symbols used to prompt the user that the electronic device is undergoing data migration. , and/or, relevant text/symbols used to prompt the user to keep two devices placed close to each other.
在本申请实施例中,在数据迁移过程中,用户在数据传输界面切换出去之后,电子设备100和电子设备200不仅可以显示全局进度提示信息,同时,还可以实时显示应用程序的数据的迁移进度(也可以称为克隆进度)提示信息。In the embodiment of the present application, during the data migration process, after the user switches out of the data transmission interface, the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 can not only display global progress prompt information, but also display the migration progress of the application data in real time. (Can also be called cloning progress) prompt information.
下面结合图6A-图6D、图7A-图7H介绍电子设备100和电子设备200实时显示应用程序的数据的迁 移进度提示信息的可能的实现方式。The following describes the real-time display application data migration of the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 with reference to FIGS. 6A-6D and 7A-7H. Possible implementation of moving progress prompt information.
其中,电子设备100和电子设备200实时显示应用程序的数据的迁移进度提示信息的可能的实现方式可以包括但不限于以下两种:一种是,电子设备100和电子设备200以“独立应用程序的粒度”来实时显示每一个应用程序的数据的迁移进度提示信息;另一种是,电子设备100和电子设备200以“文件夹的粒度”来实时显示该文件夹中包括的应用程序的数据的整体迁移进度提示信息,下面分别进行详细介绍:Among them, the possible implementation methods for the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 to display the migration progress prompt information of the application data in real time may include but are not limited to the following two methods: one is that the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 display the migration progress prompt information of the application program in real time. The other is that the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 display the data of the applications included in the folder in real time at the "granularity of the folder". The overall migration progress prompt information is introduced in detail below:
图6A-图6D示例性示出了电子设备100和电子设备200以“独立应用程序的粒度”来实时显示每一个应用程序的数据的迁移进度提示信息的过程中涉及的一系列用户界面。6A to 6D exemplarily illustrate a series of user interfaces involved in the process of the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 displaying the migration progress prompt information of each application's data in real time at the "independent application granularity".
图6A-图6B是电子设备100以“独立应用程序的粒度”来实时显示每一个应用程序的数据的迁移进度提示信息的过程中涉及的一组用户界面。6A-6B are a set of user interfaces involved in the process of the electronic device 100 displaying the migration progress prompt information of the data of each application program in real time at the "independent application granularity".
参阅图6A,图6A示例性所示的用户界面610可以为电子设备100的“桌面”应用程序提供的一个用户界面。该用户界面中可以包括一个或多个应用程序的图标(例如图标611、图标612等),这一个或多个应用程序的图标对应的应用程序可以是电子设备200正在向电子设备100进行数据迁移的应用程序。Referring to FIG. 6A , the user interface 610 illustrated in FIG. 6A may be a user interface provided by a “desktop” application of the electronic device 100 . The user interface may include one or more application icons (such as icon 611, icon 612, etc.). The application corresponding to the one or more application icons may be that the electronic device 200 is migrating data to the electronic device 100. s application.
在本申请实施例中,上述一个或多个应用程序的图标可以是电子设备200在数据迁移开始后优先发送过来的,以便电子设备100可以进行显示。In this embodiment of the present application, the icons of the one or more application programs mentioned above may be sent by the electronic device 200 in priority after the data migration starts, so that the electronic device 100 can display them.
为了便于用户获知每一个应用程序的数据的迁移进度,电子设备100可以在图6A所示的用户界面610中实时显示这一个或多个应用程序的数据的迁移进度提示信息,例如,电子设备100可以在应用程序的图标上显示该应用程序接收数据的进度条;又例如,还可以在应用程序的图标的下方显示该应用程序接收数据的状态(例如“接收中”、“待接收”)。In order to facilitate the user to know the data migration progress of each application program, the electronic device 100 can display the migration progress prompt information of the data of one or more application programs in real time in the user interface 610 shown in FIG. 6A , for example, the electronic device 100 The progress bar of the application receiving the data may be displayed on the application's icon; for another example, the status of the application receiving the data (such as "receiving", "to be received") may also be displayed below the application's icon.
示例性地,继续参阅图6A,以应用程序1(简称应用1)的图标和应用程序2(简称应用2)的图标为例,可以看出,在应用程序1的图标上可以显示有进度条611a,进度条611a可以用于表示应用程序1接收数据的进度,从进度条611a上可以看出该应用程序1已经接收了一部分来自电子设备200发送的数据,此外,在应用程序1的图标下方还可以显示有提示条611b,提示条611b可以用于提示用户应用程序1正在接收数据,处于不可用状态(即用户当前还无法使用该应用程序1)。类似地,在应用程序2的图标上可以显示有进度条612a,进度条612a可以用于表示应用程序2接收数据的进度,从进度条612a上可以看出该应用程序2还未接收来自电子设备200发送的数据,此外,在应用程序2的图标下方还可以显示有提示条612b,提示条612b可以用于提示用户应用程序2正在等待接收数据,处于不可用状态(即用户当前还无法使用该应用程序2)。For example, continuing to refer to FIG. 6A , taking the icon of Application 1 (referred to as Application 1) and the icon of Application 2 (referred to as Application 2) as an example, it can be seen that a progress bar can be displayed on the icon of Application 1 611a. The progress bar 611a can be used to indicate the progress of the application 1 receiving data. It can be seen from the progress bar 611a that the application 1 has received a part of the data sent from the electronic device 200. In addition, under the icon of the application 1 A prompt bar 611b may also be displayed, and the prompt bar 611b may be used to prompt the user that the application 1 is receiving data and is in an unavailable state (that is, the user cannot currently use the application 1). Similarly, a progress bar 612a may be displayed on the icon of Application 2. The progress bar 612a may be used to indicate the progress of Application 2 receiving data. It can be seen from the progress bar 612a that Application 2 has not yet received data from the electronic device. 200. In addition, a prompt bar 612b may be displayed below the icon of Application 2. The prompt bar 612b may be used to prompt the user that Application 2 is waiting to receive data and is in an unavailable state (that is, the user cannot currently use the Application 2).
需要说明的是,本申请实施例对上述进度条的显示形式(例如形状、颜色、透明度等)不作限定,例如,可以为图6A中所示的扇形形状,也可以为图6B中所示的环形形状(这样可以减少对应用程序的图标的遮挡),等等。此外,本申请实施例对上述提示条的显示形式(例如显示位置、形状等)不作限定。例如,可以显示在图6A所示应用程序的图标的下方,也可以显示在应用程序的图标的其他位置。It should be noted that the embodiment of the present application does not limit the display form (such as shape, color, transparency, etc.) of the above-mentioned progress bar. For example, it can be a fan shape as shown in Figure 6A, or it can be as shown in Figure 6B Ring shape (this reduces occlusion of the app's icon), etc. In addition, the embodiments of the present application do not limit the display form (such as display position, shape, etc.) of the above prompt bar. For example, it may be displayed below the icon of the application program shown in FIG. 6A , or may be displayed in other positions of the icon of the application program.
可选地,为了可以让用户更直观地获知应用程序接收数据的进度,还可以在应用程序的图标上显示接收数据的百分比,例如,处于“接收中”状态下的应用程序接收了40%的数据,那么,可以在应用程序的图标上显示“40%”;又例如,处于“待接收”状态下的应用程序还未接收数据,那么,可以在应用程序的图标上显示“0%”;Optionally, in order to let the user more intuitively know the progress of the application receiving data, the percentage of received data can also be displayed on the application's icon. For example, an application in the "Receiving" state has received 40% of the data. data, then "40%" can be displayed on the application's icon; for another example, if an application in the "pending" state has not received data, then "0%" can be displayed on the application's icon;
图6C-图6D是电子设备200以“独立应用程序的粒度”来实时显示每一个应用程序的数据的迁移进度提示信息的过程中涉及的一组用户界面。6C to 6D are a set of user interfaces involved in the process of the electronic device 200 displaying the migration progress prompt information of the data of each application program in real time at the "independent application granularity".
参阅图6C,图6C示例性所示的用户界面620可以为电子设备200的“桌面”应用程序提供的一个用户界面。该用户界面中可以包括一个或多个应用程序的图标(例如图标621、图标622等),这一个或多个应用程序的图标对应的应用程序可以是电子设备200正在向电子设备100进行数据迁移的应用程序。Referring to FIG. 6C , the user interface 620 illustrated in FIG. 6C may be a user interface provided by a “desktop” application of the electronic device 200 . The user interface may include one or more application icons (such as icon 621, icon 622, etc.). The application corresponding to the one or more application icons may be that the electronic device 200 is migrating data to the electronic device 100. s application.
为了便于用户获知每一个应用程序的数据的迁移进度,电子设备200可以在图6C所示的用户界面620中实时显示这一个或多个应用程序的数据的迁移进度提示信息,例如,电子设备200可以在应用程序的图标上显示该应用程序发送数据的进度条;又例如,还可以在应用程序的图标的下方显示该应用程序发送数据的状态(例如“发送中”、“待发送”)。In order to facilitate the user to know the data migration progress of each application program, the electronic device 200 can display the migration progress prompt information of the data of one or more application programs in real time in the user interface 620 shown in FIG. 6C , for example, the electronic device 200 A progress bar for sending data by the application may be displayed on the icon of the application; for another example, the status of data being sent by the application (for example, "sending", "to be sent") may also be displayed below the icon of the application.
示例性地,继续参阅图6C,同样以应用程序1(简称应用1)的图标和应用程序2(简称应用2)的图标为例,可以看出,在应用程序1的图标上可以显示有进度条621a,进度条621a可以用于表示应用程 序1发送数据的进度,从进度条621a上可以看出该应用程序1已经向电子设备100发送了一部分数据,此外,在应用程序1的图标下方还可以显示有提示条621b,提示条621b可以用于提示用户应用程序1正在发送数据,处于不可用状态(即用户当前还无法使用该应用程序1)。类似地,在应用程序2的图标上显示有进度条622a,进度条622a可以用于表示应用程序2发送数据的进度,从进度条622a上可以看出该应用程序2还未向电子设备100发送数据,此外,在应用程序2的图标下方还显示有提示条622b,提示条612b可以用于提示用户应用程序2正在等待发送数据,处于不可用状态(即用户当前还无法使用该应用程序2)。For example, continuing to refer to Figure 6C, taking the icon of Application 1 (referred to as Application 1) and the icon of Application 2 (referred to as Application 2) as an example, it can be seen that progress can be displayed on the icon of Application 1 Bar 621a and progress bar 621a can be used to represent the application process. The progress of data sending in sequence 1 is shown in the progress bar 621a. It can be seen from the progress bar 621a that the application 1 has sent part of the data to the electronic device 100. In addition, a prompt bar 621b can also be displayed below the icon of the application 1. The prompt bar 621b can Used to prompt the user that application 1 is sending data and is in an unavailable state (that is, the user cannot currently use application 1). Similarly, a progress bar 622a is displayed on the icon of Application 2. The progress bar 622a can be used to indicate the progress of Application 2 sending data. From the progress bar 622a, it can be seen that Application 2 has not yet sent data to the electronic device 100. Data, in addition, a prompt bar 622b is also displayed below the icon of Application 2. The prompt bar 612b can be used to prompt the user that Application 2 is waiting to send data and is in an unavailable state (that is, the user cannot currently use Application 2) .
需要说明的是,本申请实施例对上述进度条的显示形式(例如形状、颜色、透明度等)不作限定,例如,可以为图6C中所示的扇形形状,也可以为图6D中所示的环形形状(这样可以减少对应用程序的图标的遮挡),等等。此外,本申请实施例对上述提示条的显示形式(例如显示位置、形状等)不作限定。例如,可以显示在图6C所示应用程序的图标的下方,也可以显示在应用程序的图标的其他位置。It should be noted that the embodiment of the present application does not limit the display form (such as shape, color, transparency, etc.) of the above-mentioned progress bar. For example, it can be a fan shape as shown in Figure 6C, or it can be as shown in Figure 6D Ring shape (this reduces occlusion of the app's icon), etc. In addition, the embodiments of the present application do not limit the display form (such as display position, shape, etc.) of the above prompt bar. For example, it may be displayed below the application icon shown in FIG. 6C , or may be displayed at other positions of the application icon.
可选地,为了可以让用户更直观地获知应用程序发送数据的进度,还可以在应用程序的图标上显示发送数据的百分比,例如,处于“发送中”状态下的应用程序发送了40%的数据,那么,可以在应用程序的图标上显示“40%”;又例如,处于“待发送”状态下的应用程序还未发送数据,那么,可以在应用程序的图标上显示“0%”;Optionally, in order to let the user more intuitively know the progress of the application sending data, the percentage of data sent can also be displayed on the application's icon. For example, an application in the "Sending" state has sent 40% of the data. data, then "40%" can be displayed on the application's icon; for another example, if the application in the "pending" state has not sent data, then "0%" can be displayed on the application's icon;
图7A-图7H示例性示出了电子设备100和电子设备200以“文件夹的粒度”来实时显示该文件夹中包括的应用程序的数据的整体迁移进度提示信息的过程中涉及的一系列用户界面。7A to 7H exemplarily illustrate a series of processes involved in the process in which the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 display in real time the overall migration progress prompt information of the data of the application program included in the folder at the "granularity of the folder". user interface.
图7A-图7D是电子设备100以“文件夹的粒度”来实时显示该文件夹中包括的应用程序的数据的整体迁移进度提示信息的过程中涉及的一组用户界面。7A-7D are a set of user interfaces involved in the process of the electronic device 100 displaying in real time the overall migration progress prompt information of the data of the application program included in the folder at the "granularity of the folder".
参阅图7A,图7A示例性所示的用户界面710可以为电子设备100的“桌面”应用程序提供的一个用户界面。该用户界面中可以包括一个或多个文件夹(例如文件夹711等),这一个或多个文件夹中包括的应用程序可以是电子设备200正在向电子设备100进行数据迁移的应用程序。Referring to FIG. 7A , the user interface 710 illustrated in FIG. 7A may be a user interface provided by a “desktop” application of the electronic device 100 . The user interface may include one or more folders (eg, folder 711 , etc.), and the applications included in the one or more folders may be applications that the electronic device 200 is migrating data to the electronic device 100 .
通常情况下,同一个文件夹中包括的应用程序是同一类型的应用程序或用户常用的应用程序,因此,电子设备100可以在图7A所示的用户界面710中以“文件夹的粒度”来实时显示该文件夹中包括的应用程序的数据的整体迁移进度提示信息,例如,电子设备100可以在文件夹上显示该文件夹中包括的应用程序接收数据的进度条;又例如,还可以在文件夹上显示该文件夹中包括的应用程序接收数据的状态(例如“接收中”、“待接收”)。Usually, the applications included in the same folder are the same type of applications or applications commonly used by users. Therefore, the electronic device 100 can use "folder granularity" in the user interface 710 shown in FIG. 7A The overall migration progress prompt information of the data of the application program included in the folder is displayed in real time. For example, the electronic device 100 can display a progress bar on the folder for the application program included in the folder to receive data; for another example, the electronic device 100 can also display on the folder a progress bar of the application program included in the folder. The status of data received by applications included in the folder is displayed on the folder (for example, "receiving", "to be received").
示例性地,继续参阅图7A,同样以应用程序1和应用程序2为例,应用程序1和应用程序2均为文件夹711中的应用程序。可以看出,文件夹711上显示有进度条711a,进度条711a可以用于表示文件夹711中包括的应用程序接收数据的整体进度,从进度条711a上可以看出该文件夹711中包括的应用程序已经接收了一部分来自电子设备200发送的数据,此外,在文件夹711上还可以显示有提示条711b,提示条711b可以用于提示用户文件夹711中包括的应用程序正在接收数据。For example, continuing to refer to FIG. 7A , application 1 and application 2 are also taken as an example. Application 1 and application 2 are both applications in the folder 711 . It can be seen that a progress bar 711a is displayed on the folder 711. The progress bar 711a can be used to indicate the overall progress of the application included in the folder 711 receiving data. It can be seen from the progress bar 711a that the application included in the folder 711 The application program has received part of the data sent from the electronic device 200. In addition, a prompt bar 711b may be displayed on the folder 711. The prompt bar 711b may be used to prompt the user that the application program included in the folder 711 is receiving data.
继续参阅图7A,如果用户想要查看文件夹711中包括的每一个应用程序的数据的迁移进度,那么,电子设备100可以检测到用户针对文件夹711的操作(例如长按操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100可以显示图7B示例性所示的窗口720,该窗口中可以包括选项721,选项721可以用于将文件夹711显示为大文件夹。进一步地,电子设备100可以检测到用户针对选项721的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100可以在图7C中将文件夹711显示为大文件夹,这样,用户就可以查看到该文件夹中包括的每一个应用程序的数据的迁移进度了。Continuing to refer to FIG. 7A , if the user wants to view the migration progress of data of each application included in the folder 711 , the electronic device 100 can detect the user's operation (such as a long press operation) on the folder 711 and respond to In this operation, the electronic device 100 may display the window 720 as exemplarily shown in FIG. 7B , and the window may include an option 721 , and the option 721 may be used to display the folder 711 as a large folder. Further, the electronic device 100 can detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 721. In response to the operation, the electronic device 100 can display the folder 711 as a large folder in FIG. 7C, so that the user can view The migration progress is made to the data of each application included in this folder.
由于文件夹的尺寸有限,应用程序的数据的迁移进度信息的显示尺寸也就会比较小,因此,为了便于用户更清晰地查看到该文件夹中包括的每一个应用程序的数据的迁移进度,电子设备100可以支持用户点击图7C所示的文件夹,之后,电子设备100可以在图7D中显示尺寸较大的应用程序的数据的迁移进度信息。Due to the limited size of the folder, the display size of the application data migration progress information will be relatively small. Therefore, in order to facilitate the user to more clearly view the data migration progress of each application included in the folder, The electronic device 100 may support the user to click the folder shown in FIG. 7C , and then the electronic device 100 may display the migration progress information of the data of the larger application program in FIG. 7D .
需要说明的是,本申请实施例对上述进度条的显示形式(例如形状、颜色、透明度等)不作限定,例如,可以为图7A中所示的扇形形状,也可以为其他形状(例如环形形状,这样可以减少对文件夹的遮挡),等等。此外,本申请实施例对上述提示条的显示形式(例如显示位置、形状等)不作限定。例如,可以显 示在图7A所示文件夹上,也可以显示文件夹的其他位置(例如文件夹的下方)。It should be noted that the embodiments of the present application do not limit the display form (such as shape, color, transparency, etc.) of the progress bar. For example, it can be a fan shape as shown in Figure 7A or other shapes (such as a ring shape). , which can reduce the occlusion of the folder), etc. In addition, the embodiments of the present application do not limit the display form (such as display position, shape, etc.) of the above prompt bar. For example, you can display is shown on the folder shown in Figure 7A, and may also be displayed in other locations of the folder (eg, below the folder).
可选地,为了可以让用户更直观地获知文件夹中包括的应用程序接收数据的整体进度,还可以在文件夹上显示接收数据的百分比,例如,处于“接收中”状态下的文件夹接收了40%的数据,那么,可以在文件夹上显示“40%”;又例如,处于“待接收”状态下的文件夹还未接收数据,那么,可以在文件夹上显示“0%”;Optionally, in order to allow users to more intuitively know the overall progress of receiving data by applications included in the folder, the percentage of data received can also be displayed on the folder, for example, the folder receiving in the "receiving" state If 40% of the data has been received, then "40%" can be displayed on the folder; for another example, if the folder in the "waiting to receive" state has not yet received data, then "0%" can be displayed on the folder;
图7E-图7H是电子设备200以“文件夹的粒度”来实时显示该文件夹中包括的应用程序的数据的整体迁移进度提示信息的过程中涉及的一组用户界面。7E to 7H are a set of user interfaces involved in the process of the electronic device 200 displaying the overall migration progress prompt information of the data of the application program included in the folder in real time at a "folder granularity".
参阅图7E,图7E示例性所示的用户界面730可以为电子设备200的“桌面”应用程序提供的一个用户界面。该用户界面中可以包括一个或多个文件夹(例如文件夹731等),这一个或多个文件夹中包括的应用程序可以是电子设备200正在向电子设备100进行数据迁移的应用程序。Referring to FIG. 7E , the user interface 730 illustrated in FIG. 7E may be a user interface provided by a “desktop” application of the electronic device 200 . The user interface may include one or more folders (eg, folder 731 , etc.), and the applications included in the one or more folders may be applications that the electronic device 200 is migrating data to the electronic device 100 .
通常情况下,同一个文件夹中包括的应用程序是同一类型的应用程序或用户常用的应用程序,因此,电子设备200可以在图7E所示的用户界面730中以“文件夹的粒度”来实时显示该文件夹中包括的应用程序的数据的整体迁移进度提示信息,例如,电子设备200可以在文件夹上显示该文件夹中包括的应用程序发送数据的进度条;又例如,还可以在文件夹上显示该文件夹中包括的应用程序发送数据的状态(例如“发送中”、“待发送”)。Usually, the applications included in the same folder are the same type of applications or applications commonly used by users. Therefore, the electronic device 200 can use the “folder granularity” in the user interface 730 shown in FIG. 7E to The overall migration progress prompt information of the data of the application program included in the folder is displayed in real time. For example, the electronic device 200 can display a progress bar of the data sent by the application program included in the folder on the folder; for another example, the electronic device 200 can also display on the folder a progress bar of the application program included in the folder. The status of data sent by the applications included in the folder is displayed on the folder (for example, "Sending", "To be sent").
示例性地,继续参阅图7E,同样以应用程序1和应用程序2为例,应用程序1和应用程序2均为文件夹731中的应用程序。可以看出,文件夹731上显示有进度条731a,进度条731a可以用于表示文件夹731中包括的应用程序发送数据的整体进度,从进度条731a上可以看出该文件夹731中包括的应用程序已经向电子设备100发送了一部分数据,此外,在文件夹731上还可以显示有提示条731b,提示条731b可以用于提示用户文件夹731中包括的应用程序正在发送数据。For example, continuing to refer to FIG. 7E , application 1 and application 2 are also taken as examples. Application 1 and application 2 are both applications in folder 731 . It can be seen that a progress bar 731a is displayed on the folder 731. The progress bar 731a can be used to indicate the overall progress of sending data by the application program included in the folder 731. From the progress bar 731a, it can be seen that the progress bar 731a included in the folder 731 The application program has sent part of the data to the electronic device 100. In addition, a prompt bar 731b may be displayed on the folder 731. The prompt bar 731b may be used to prompt the user that the application program included in the folder 731 is sending data.
继续参阅图7E,如果用户想要查看文件夹731中包括的每一个应用程序的数据的迁移进度,那么,电子设备100可以检测到用户针对文件夹731的操作(例如长按操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100可以显示图7F示例性所示的窗口740,该窗口中可以包括选项741,选项741可以用于将文件夹731显示为大文件夹。进一步地,电子设备100可以检测到用户针对选项741的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100可以在图7G中将文件夹731显示为大文件夹,这样,用户就可以查看到该文件夹中包括的每一个应用程序的数据的迁移进度了。Continuing to refer to FIG. 7E , if the user wants to view the migration progress of data of each application included in the folder 731 , the electronic device 100 can detect the user's operation (such as a long press operation) on the folder 731 and respond to In this operation, the electronic device 100 may display the window 740 exemplarily shown in FIG. 7F , which may include an option 741 , and the option 741 may be used to display the folder 731 as a large folder. Further, the electronic device 100 can detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 741. In response to the operation, the electronic device 100 can display the folder 731 as a large folder in FIG. 7G, so that the user can view The migration progress is made to the data of each application included in this folder.
由于文件夹的尺寸有限,应用程序的数据的迁移进度信息的显示尺寸也就会比较小,因此,为了便于用户更清晰地查看到该文件夹中包括的每一个应用程序的数据的迁移进度,电子设备200可以支持用户点击图7G所示的文件夹,之后,电子设备100可以在图7H中显示尺寸较大的应用程序的数据的迁移进度信息。Due to the limited size of the folder, the display size of the application data migration progress information will be relatively small. Therefore, in order to facilitate the user to more clearly view the data migration progress of each application included in the folder, The electronic device 200 may support the user to click the folder shown in FIG. 7G, and then the electronic device 100 may display the migration progress information of the data of the larger application program in FIG. 7H.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例对上述进度条的显示形式(例如形状、颜色、透明度等)不作限定,例如,可以为图7E中所示的扇形形状,也可以为其他形状(例如环形形状,这样可以减少对文件夹的遮挡),等等。此外,本申请实施例对上述提示条的显示形式(例如显示位置、形状等)不作限定。例如,可以显示在图7E所示文件夹上,也可以显示文件夹的其他位置(例如文件夹的下方)。It should be noted that the embodiments of the present application do not limit the display form (such as shape, color, transparency, etc.) of the progress bar. For example, it can be a fan shape as shown in Figure 7E or other shapes (such as a ring shape). , which can reduce the occlusion of the folder), etc. In addition, the embodiments of the present application do not limit the display form (such as display position, shape, etc.) of the above prompt bar. For example, it can be displayed on the folder shown in Figure 7E, or it can be displayed in other locations of the folder (for example, below the folder).
可选地,为了可以让用户更直观地获知文件夹中包括的应用程序接收数据的整体进度,还可以在文件夹上显示接收数据的百分比,例如,处于“发送中”状态下的文件夹发送了40%的数据,那么,可以在文件夹上显示“40%”;又例如,处于“待发送”状态下的文件夹还未发送数据,那么,可以在文件夹上显示“0%”;Optionally, in order to allow the user to more intuitively know the overall progress of receiving data by the applications included in the folder, the percentage of received data can also be displayed on the folder, for example, the folder sending in the "Sending" state If 40% of the data has been sent, then "40%" can be displayed on the folder; for example, if the folder in the "pending" state has not yet sent data, then "0%" can be displayed on the folder;
在本申请实施例中,在数据迁移过程中,电子设备100和电子设备200还可以支持用户针对正在进行数据迁移的应用程序的图标进行操作,以优先迁移该应用程序的数据,以便用户可以尽快使用该应用程序,并且可以显示相应的提示信息来提示用户已优先迁移该应用程序的数据。In the embodiment of the present application, during the data migration process, the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 can also support the user to operate on the icon of the application that is undergoing data migration, so as to migrate the data of the application first, so that the user can migrate the data as soon as possible. Use the application, and corresponding prompt information can be displayed to prompt the user that the application's data has been migrated first.
下面结合图8A-图8D、图9A-图9D介绍电子设备100和电子设备200优先迁移应用程序的数据并显示相关提示信息的可能的实现方式。The following describes a possible implementation manner in which the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 preferentially migrate application data and display relevant prompt information in conjunction with FIGS. 8A-8D and 9A-9D.
其中,电子设备100和电子设备200优先迁移应用程序的数据并显示相关提示信息的可能的实现方式 可以包括但不限于以下两种:一种是,电子设备100和电子设备200以“独立应用程序的粒度”来优先迁移应用程序的数据并显示相关提示信息;另一种是,电子设备100和电子设备200以“文件夹的粒度”来优先迁移该文件夹中包括的应用程序的数据并显示相关提示信息,下面分别进行详细介绍:Among them, there is a possible implementation method in which the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 give priority to migrating application data and display relevant prompt information. It may include but is not limited to the following two types: one is that the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 migrate the data of the application program first and display relevant prompt information at the "granularity of independent applications"; the other is that the electronic device 100 and The electronic device 200 preferentially migrates the data of the applications included in the folder based on the "granularity of the folder" and displays relevant prompt information, which are described in detail below:
图8A-图8D示例性示出了电子设备100和电子设备200以“独立应用程序的粒度”来优先迁移应用程序的数据并显示相关提示信息的过程中涉及的一系列用户界面。8A-8D exemplarily illustrate a series of user interfaces involved in the process of the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 migrating application data preferentially and displaying relevant prompt information at the "independent application granularity".
参阅图8A,图8A示例性所示的用户界面810可以为电子设备100的“桌面”应用程序提供的一个用户界面。该用户界面中可以包括一个或多个应用程序的图标(例如应用程序1的图标、应用程序2的图标等),这一个或多个应用程序的图标对应的应用程序可以是电子设备200正在向电子设备100进行数据迁移的应用程序,每一个应用程序的图标可以实时显示有该应用程序的数据的迁移进度提示信息。Referring to FIG. 8A , the user interface 810 illustrated in FIG. 8A may be a user interface provided by a “desktop” application of the electronic device 100 . The user interface may include one or more application icons (such as application 1 icon, application 2 icon, etc.), and the application corresponding to the one or more application icons may be the application that the electronic device 200 is sending to. For applications that the electronic device 100 performs data migration, the icon of each application can display prompt information on the migration progress of the data of the application in real time.
从图8A中可以看出,应用程序2正在等待接收数据,即还没有开始接收数据。如果用户想要优先迁移应用程序2的数据,那么,电子设备100可以检测到用户针对应用程序2的图标的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100可以优先接收该应用程序的数据,同时,电子设备100还可以将图8A所示的“待接收”提示条更新显示为图8B所示的“优先接收中”提示条。此外,电子设备100还可以向电子设备200发送消息,以便通知电子设备200优先发送应用程序2的数据。进一步地,电子设备200在接收到电子设备100发送的上述消息之后,电子设备200可以优先发送该应用程序的数据,同时,电子设备200还可以将应用程序2发送数据状态的提示条显示为图8C所示的“优先发送中”提示条。这样,可以便于用户获知应用程序2的数据是否已经成功被优先迁移了。As can be seen from Figure 8A, Application 2 is waiting to receive data, that is, it has not started receiving data yet. If the user wants to preferentially migrate the data of application program 2, then the electronic device 100 can detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on the icon of application program 2, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 can preferentially receive the data of the application program 2. At the same time, the electronic device 100 can also update and display the "to be received" prompt bar shown in FIG. 8A to the "priority receiving" prompt bar shown in FIG. 8B. In addition, the electronic device 100 may also send a message to the electronic device 200 so as to notify the electronic device 200 to send the data of the application 2 first. Further, after the electronic device 200 receives the above message sent by the electronic device 100, the electronic device 200 can send the data of the application program first. At the same time, the electronic device 200 can also display a prompt bar of the data sending status of the application program 2 as shown in the figure. The "Priority Sending" prompt bar shown in 8C. In this way, the user can easily know whether the data of application 2 has been successfully migrated first.
上述以用户通过操作电子设备100为例来介绍实现优先迁移应用程序2的数据的过程,容易理解,用户也可以通过操作电子设备200来实现优先迁移应用程序2的数据。The above description uses the user's operation of the electronic device 100 as an example to introduce the process of prioritizing the data migration of the application program 2. It is easy to understand that the user can also implement the priority migration of the data of the application program 2 by operating the electronic device 200.
参阅图8D,可以看出,应用程序2正在等待发送数据,即还没有开始发送数据。如果用户想要优先迁移应用程序2的数据,那么,电子设备200可以检测到用户针对应用程序2的图标的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备200可以优先发送该应用程序的数据,同时,电子设备200还可以将图8D所示的“待发送”提示条更新显示为图8C所示的“优先发送中”提示条。此外,电子设备200还可以向电子设备100发送消息,以便通知电子设备100优先接收应用程序2的数据。进一步地,电子设备100在接收到电子设备200发送的上述消息之后,电子设备100可以优先接收该应用程序的数据,同时,电子设备100还可以将图8A所示的“待接收”提示条更新显示为图8B所示的“优先接收中”提示条。这样,可以便于用户获知应用程序2的数据是否已经成功被优先迁移了。Referring to Figure 8D, it can be seen that application 2 is waiting to send data, that is, it has not started sending data yet. If the user wants to migrate the data of application 2 first, then the electronic device 200 can detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on the icon of application 2, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 200 can send the application's data first. At the same time, the electronic device 200 can also update and display the "to be sent" prompt bar shown in Figure 8D to the "priority sending" prompt bar shown in Figure 8C. In addition, the electronic device 200 may also send a message to the electronic device 100 to notify the electronic device 100 to receive the data of the application program 2 in priority. Further, after the electronic device 100 receives the above message sent by the electronic device 200, the electronic device 100 can receive the data of the application program first, and at the same time, the electronic device 100 can also update the "to be received" prompt bar shown in Figure 8A The "Priority Receiving" prompt bar shown in Figure 8B is displayed. In this way, the user can easily know whether the data of application 2 has been successfully migrated first.
图9A-图9D示例性示出了电子设备100和电子设备200以“文件夹的粒度”来优先迁移该文件夹中包括的应用程序的数据并显示相关提示信息的过程中涉及的一系列用户界面。9A to 9D exemplarily illustrate a series of users involved in the process of the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 preferentially migrating data of applications included in the folder at a "folder granularity" and displaying related prompt information. interface.
参阅图9A,图9A示例性所示的用户界面910可以为电子设备100的“桌面”应用程序提供的一个用户界面。该用户界面中可以包括一个或多个文件夹(例如文件夹911、文件夹912等),这一个或多个文件夹中包括的应用程序可以是电子设备200正在向电子设备100进行数据迁移的应用程序。每一个文件夹上可以实时显示有该文件夹中包括的应用程序的数据的整体迁移进度提示信息。Referring to FIG. 9A , the user interface 910 illustrated in FIG. 9A may be a user interface provided by a “desktop” application of the electronic device 100 . The user interface may include one or more folders (such as folder 911, folder 912, etc.), and the applications included in this one or more folders may be the applications that the electronic device 200 is migrating to the electronic device 100. app. Each folder can display the overall migration progress prompt information of the application data included in the folder in real time.
从图9A中可以看出,文件夹912中包括的应用程序均正在等待接收数据,即还没有开始接收数据。如果用户想要优先迁移文件夹912中包括的应用程序的数据,那么,电子设备100可以检测到用户针对文件夹912的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100可以优先接收文件夹912中包括的应用程序的数据,同时,电子设备100还可以将图9A所示的“待接收”提示条更新显示为图9B所示的“优先接收中”提示条。此外,电子设备100还可以向电子设备200发送消息,以便通知电子设备200优先发送文件夹912中包括的应用程序的数据。进一步地,电子设备200在接收到电子设备100发送的上述消息之后,电子设备200可以优先发送文件夹912中包括的应用程序的数据,同时,电子设备200还可以将文件夹912中包括的应用程序发送数据状态的提示条显示为图9C所示的“优先发送中”提示条。这样,可以便于用户获知文件夹912中包括的应用程序的数据是否已经成功被优先迁移了。As can be seen from FIG. 9A , the applications included in the folder 912 are all waiting to receive data, that is, they have not started receiving data yet. If the user wants to preferentially migrate the data of the application program included in the folder 912, the electronic device 100 may detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on the folder 912, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may preferentially receive the file. At the same time, the electronic device 100 can also update and display the "to be received" prompt bar shown in FIG. 9A to the "priority receiving" prompt bar shown in FIG. 9B. In addition, the electronic device 100 may also send a message to the electronic device 200 in order to notify the electronic device 200 to send data of the application program included in the folder 912 with priority. Further, after the electronic device 200 receives the above message sent by the electronic device 100, the electronic device 200 can send the data of the application included in the folder 912 first. At the same time, the electronic device 200 can also send the application included in the folder 912. The prompt bar of the program sending data status is displayed as the "priority sending" prompt bar shown in Figure 9C. In this way, it is convenient for the user to know whether the data of the application program included in the folder 912 has been successfully migrated first.
上述以用户通过操作电子设备100为例来介绍实现优先迁移文件夹912中包括的应用程序的数据的过程,容易理解,用户也可以通过操作电子设备200来实现优先迁移文件夹912中包括的应用程序的数据。The above description uses the user's operation of the electronic device 100 as an example to introduce the process of prioritizing the migration of the data of the applications included in the folder 912. It is easy to understand that the user can also implement the priority migration of the applications included in the folder 912 by operating the electronic device 200. program data.
参阅图9D,可以看出,文件夹912中包括的应用程序均正在等待发送数据,即还没有开始发送数据。如果用户想要优先迁移文件夹912中包括的应用程序的数据,那么,电子设备200可以检测到用户针对文 件夹912的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备200可以优先发送文件夹912中包括的应用程序的数据,同时,电子设备200还可以将图9D所示的“待发送”提示条更新显示为图9C所示的“优先发送中”提示条。此外,电子设备200还可以向电子设备100发送消息,以便通知电子设备100优先接收文件夹912中包括的应用程序的数据。进一步地,电子设备100在接收到电子设备200发送的上述消息之后,电子设备100可以优先接收文件夹912中包括的应用程序的数据,同时,电子设备100还可以将图9A所示的“待接收”提示条更新显示为图9B所示的“优先接收中”提示条。这样,便于用户获知文件夹912中包括的应用程序的数据是否已经成功被优先迁移了。Referring to Figure 9D, it can be seen that the applications included in the folder 912 are all waiting to send data, that is, they have not started sending data yet. If the user wants to migrate data of the application program included in the folder 912 first, the electronic device 200 may detect that the user is targeting the file. In response to the operation of the folder 912 (such as a click operation), the electronic device 200 can send the data of the application program included in the folder 912 with priority. At the same time, the electronic device 200 can also send the "to be sent" shown in FIG. 9D The prompt bar is updated and displayed as the "Priority Sending" prompt bar shown in Figure 9C. In addition, the electronic device 200 may also send a message to the electronic device 100 in order to notify the electronic device 100 to preferentially receive data of the application program included in the folder 912 . Further, after the electronic device 100 receives the above message sent by the electronic device 200, the electronic device 100 can preferentially receive the data of the application program included in the folder 912. At the same time, the electronic device 100 can also change the "to-be" shown in FIG. 9A. The "receiving" prompt bar is updated and displayed as the "priority receiving" prompt bar shown in Figure 9B. In this way, it is convenient for the user to know whether the data of the application program included in the folder 912 has been successfully migrated first.
在本申请实施例中,在数据迁移过程中,电子设备100和电子设备200还可以支持用户针对正在进行数据迁移的应用程序的图标进行操作,以停止迁移该应用程序的数据。In the embodiment of the present application, during the data migration process, the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 can also support the user to operate on the icon of the application that is undergoing data migration to stop migrating the data of the application.
下面结合图10A-图10K、图11A-图11I介绍电子设备100和电子设备200停止迁移应用程序的数据的可能的实现方式。A possible implementation method for the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 to stop migrating application data will be introduced below with reference to FIGS. 10A to 10K and 11A to 11I.
其中,电子设备100和电子设备200停止迁移应用程序的数据的可能的实现方式可以包括但不限于以下两种:一种是,电子设备100和电子设备200以“独立应用程序的粒度”来停止迁移应用程序的数据;另一种是,电子设备100和电子设备200以“文件夹的粒度”来停止迁移该文件夹中包括的应用程序的数据,下面分别进行详细介绍:Possible ways for the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 to stop migrating application data may include but are not limited to the following two methods: one is to stop the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 at the "granularity of independent applications" Migrate the data of the application program; the other method is that the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 stop migrating the data of the application program included in the folder at the "granularity of the folder", which will be introduced in detail below:
图10A-图10K示例性示出了电子设备100和电子设备200以“独立应用程序的粒度”来停止迁移应用程序的数据的过程中涉及的一系列用户界面。10A-10K exemplarily illustrate a series of user interfaces involved in the process of the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 migrating data of an application program at "independent application granularity".
参阅图10A,图10A示例性所示的用户界面1010可以为电子设备200的“桌面”应用程序提供的一个用户界面。该用户界面中可以包括一个或多个应用程序的图标(例如应用程序1的图标、应用程序2的图标等),这一个或多个应用程序的图标对应的应用程序可以是电子设备200正在向电子设备100进行数据迁移的应用程序,每一个应用程序的图标可以实时显示有该应用程序的数据的迁移进度提示信息。Referring to FIG. 10A , the user interface 1010 illustrated in FIG. 10A may be a user interface provided by a “desktop” application of the electronic device 200 . The user interface may include one or more application icons (such as application 1 icon, application 2 icon, etc.), and the application corresponding to the one or more application icons may be the application that the electronic device 200 is sending to. For applications that the electronic device 100 performs data migration, the icon of each application can display prompt information on the migration progress of the data of the application in real time.
从图10A中可以看出,应用程序2正在等待发送数据,即还没有开始发送数据。如果用户想要停止迁移应用程序2的数据,那么,电子设备200可以检测到用户针对应用程序2的图标的操作(例如长按操作),响应于该操作,电子设备200可以在应用程序2的图标上显示图10B示例性所示的选项1011,选项1011可以用于停止迁移应用程序2的数据。As can be seen from Figure 10A, Application 2 is waiting to send data, that is, it has not started sending data yet. If the user wants to stop migrating the data of Application 2, then the electronic device 200 can detect the user's operation (such as a long press operation) on the icon of Application 2, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 200 can The option 1011 shown as an example in FIG. 10B is displayed on the icon, and the option 1011 can be used to stop migrating the data of application 2.
在一些示例中,电子设备200在检测到用户针对应用程序2的图标的操作(例如长按操作)之后,也可以显示图10C示例性所示的窗口1020,窗口1020中可以包括选项1021,选项1021可以用于用户停止迁移应用程序2的数据。也即是说,本申请实施例对电子设备200显示“用于停止迁移应用程序2的数据”的选项的形式不作限定。In some examples, after detecting the user's operation (such as a long press operation) on the icon of application 2, the electronic device 200 may also display the window 1020 illustratively shown in FIG. 10C , and the window 1020 may include an option 1021. 1021 can be used for the user to stop migrating application 2's data. That is to say, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the form in which the electronic device 200 displays the option "for stopping migrating data of application program 2".
进一步地,电子设备200可以检测到用户针对图10B所示的选项1011(或图10C所示的选项1021)的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备200可以停止迁移应用程序2的数据,同时,参阅图10D,电子设备200还可以在应用程序2的图标上取消显示应用程序2的数据的迁移进度提示信息(例如进度条、“待发送”提示条)。这样,可以便于用户获知应用程序2的数据是否已经成功被停止迁移了。Further, the electronic device 200 may detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on the option 1011 shown in FIG. 10B (or the option 1021 shown in FIG. 10C ), and in response to the operation, the electronic device 200 may stop migrating the application 2 At the same time, referring to Figure 10D, the electronic device 200 can also cancel the display of the migration progress prompt information (such as a progress bar, a "to be sent" prompt bar) of the data of Application 2 on the icon of Application 2. In this way, it is convenient for the user to know whether the data of application 2 has been successfully stopped and migrated.
此外,电子设备200还可以向电子设备100发送消息,以便通知电子设备100停止接收应用程序2的数据。进一步地,电子设备100在接收到电子设备200发送的上述消息之后,电子设备100可以停止接收该应用程序2的数据,同时,参阅图10E,电子设备100还可以取消显示应用程序2的图标,或者,参阅图10F,电子设备100还可以将应用程序2的图标进行灰度化显示,以提示用户应用程序2处于不可用状态。这样,可以便于用户获知应用程序2的数据是否已经成功被停止迁移了。In addition, the electronic device 200 may also send a message to the electronic device 100 to notify the electronic device 100 to stop receiving data from the application program 2 . Further, after the electronic device 100 receives the above message sent by the electronic device 200, the electronic device 100 can stop receiving the data of the application program 2. At the same time, referring to Figure 10E, the electronic device 100 can also cancel the display of the icon of the application program 2, Alternatively, referring to FIG. 10F , the electronic device 100 can also display the icon of the application program 2 in grayscale to prompt the user that the application program 2 is in an unavailable state. In this way, it is convenient for the user to know whether the data of application 2 has been successfully stopped and migrated.
继续参阅图10F,电子设备100可以检测到用户针对应用程序2的图标的操作(例如长按操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100可以显示图10G示例性所示的窗口1030,窗口1030中可以包括一个或多个选项(例如选项1031、选项1032、选项1033),选项1031可以用于继续迁移应用程序2的数据,选项1032可以用于从应用市场上下载应用程序2,选项1033可以用于将应用程序2的图标移除。Continuing to refer to FIG. 10F , the electronic device 100 may detect the user's operation (such as a long press operation) on the icon of the application 2 , and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may display the window 1030 exemplarily shown in FIG. 10G . In the window 1030 One or more options (such as option 1031, option 1032, option 1033) can be included. Option 1031 can be used to continue migrating the data of application 2. Option 1032 can be used to download application 2 from the application market. Option 1033 can be used. To remove the icon of application 2.
示例性地,如果用户想要继续迁移应用程序2的数据,那么,电子设备100可以检测到用户针对选项1031的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100可以继续迁移应用程序2的数据,同时,参阅图10H,电子设备100还可以将应用程序2的图标取消灰度化显示,并在应用程序2的图标上显示应用程序2的数据的迁移进度提示信息(例如进度条、“待接收”提示条)。此外,电子设备100还可以向电子设备200发送消息,以便通知电子设备200继续发送应用程序2的数据。进一步地,电子设备200在接收到电子设备100发送的上述消息之后,电子设备200可以继续发送应用程序2的数据,同时,电子设备 200还可以在应用程序2的图标上显示应用程序2的数据的迁移进度提示信息(例如进度条、“待发送”提示条)。这样,可以便于用户获知应用程序2的数据是否已经成功被继续迁移了。For example, if the user wants to continue migrating the data of Application 2, then the electronic device 100 can detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 1031, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 can continue to migrate Application 2 At the same time, referring to Figure 10H, the electronic device 100 can also cancel the grayscale display of the icon of Application 2, and display the migration progress prompt information (such as a progress bar, "To be received" prompt bar). In addition, the electronic device 100 may also send a message to the electronic device 200 to notify the electronic device 200 to continue sending data of the application program 2. Further, after the electronic device 200 receives the above message sent by the electronic device 100, the electronic device 200 can continue to send the data of the application program 2. At the same time, the electronic device 200 200 can also display the migration progress prompt information of the data of Application 2 on the icon of Application 2 (for example, a progress bar, a "to be sent" prompt bar). In this way, it is convenient for the user to know whether the data of application 2 has been successfully migrated.
示例性地,如果用户想要从应用市场上下载应用程序2,那么,电子设备100可以检测到用户针对选项1032的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100可以打开应用市场并下载应用程序2,下载并安装完成后,用户便可以使用应用程序2了。For example, if the user wants to download application 2 from the application market, the electronic device 100 can detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 1032, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 can open the application market and Download Application 2. After the download and installation is complete, the user can use Application 2.
示例性地,如果用户想要将应用程序2的图标移除,那么,电子设备100可以检测到用户针对选项1033的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100可以如图10E所示取消显示应用程序2的图标。For example, if the user wants to remove the icon of application 2, the electronic device 100 may detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 1033, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may perform the operation as shown in FIG. 10E to cancel the display of the application 2 icon.
上述以用户通过操作电子设备200为例来介绍实现停止迁移应用程序2的数据的过程,容易理解,用户也可以通过操作电子设备100来实现停止迁移应用程序2的数据。The above description uses the user's operation of the electronic device 200 as an example to introduce the process of stopping the data migration of the application program 2. It is easy to understand that the user can also stop the migration of the data of the application program 2 by operating the electronic device 100.
参阅图10H,可以看出,应用程序2正在等待接收数据,即还没有开始接收数据。如果用户想要停止迁移应用程序2的数据,那么,电子设备100可以检测到用户针对应用程序2的图标的操作(例如长按操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100可以在应用程序2的图标上显示图10I示例性所示的选项1041,选项1041可以用于停止迁移应用程序2的数据。Referring to Figure 10H, it can be seen that application 2 is waiting to receive data, that is, it has not started receiving data yet. If the user wants to stop migrating the data of Application 2, then the electronic device 100 can detect the user's operation (such as a long press operation) on the icon of Application 2, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 can The option 1041 shown exemplarily in FIG. 10I is displayed on the icon, and the option 1041 can be used to stop migrating the data of application 2.
在一些示例中,电子设备100在检测到用户针对应用程序2的图标的操作(例如长按操作)之后,也可以显示图10J示例性所示的窗口1050,窗口1050中可以包括选项1051,选项1051可以用于停止迁移应用程序2的数据。也即是说,本申请实施例对电子设备100显示“用于停止迁移应用程序2的数据”的选项的形式不作限定。In some examples, after detecting the user's operation (such as a long press operation) on the icon of Application 2, the electronic device 100 may also display the window 1050 illustratively shown in FIG. 10J , and the window 1050 may include an option 1051. 1051 can be used to stop migrating application 2's data. That is to say, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the form in which the electronic device 100 displays the option "for stopping migrating data of application program 2".
进一步地,电子设备100可以检测到用户针对图10I所示的选项1041(或图10J所示的选项1051)的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100可以停止迁移应用程序2的数据,同时,参阅图10E,电子设备100还可以取消显示应用程序2的图标,或者,参阅图10F,电子设备100还可以将应用程序2的图标进行灰度化显示,以提示用户应用程序2处于不可用状态。这样,可以便于用户获知应用程序2的数据是否已经成功被停止迁移了。Further, the electronic device 100 may detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 1041 shown in FIG. 10I (or option 1051 shown in FIG. 10J ), and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may stop migrating application 2 At the same time, referring to Figure 10E, the electronic device 100 can also cancel the display of the icon of Application 2, or, referring to Figure 10F, the electronic device 100 can also display the icon of Application 2 in grayscale to prompt the user to apply 2 is in an unavailable state. In this way, it is convenient for the user to know whether the data of application 2 has been successfully stopped and migrated.
此外,电子设备100还可以向电子设备200发送消息,以便通知电子设备200停止发送应用程序2的数据。进一步地,电子设备200在接收到电子设备100发送的上述消息之后,电子设备100可以停止发送该应用程序2的数据,同时,参阅图10D,电子设备200还可以在应用程序2的图标上取消显示应用程序2的数据的迁移进度提示信息(例如进度条、“待发送”提示条)。这样,可以便于用户获知应用程序2的数据是否已经成功被停止迁移了。In addition, the electronic device 100 may also send a message to the electronic device 200 to notify the electronic device 200 to stop sending the data of the application program 2 . Further, after the electronic device 200 receives the above message sent by the electronic device 100, the electronic device 100 can stop sending the data of the application program 2. At the same time, referring to FIG. 10D, the electronic device 200 can also cancel the icon on the application program 2. Display the migration progress prompt information of the data of application 2 (such as progress bar, "to be sent" prompt bar). In this way, it is convenient for the user to know whether the data of application 2 has been successfully stopped and migrated.
在停止迁移应用程序2的数据之后,除了可以通过在电子设备100上针对前述图10G所示的选项1031进行操作(例如点击操作)来继续迁移应用程序2的数据之外,用户还可以在电子设备200上进行操作来继续迁移应用程序2的数据。After stopping the migration of the data of Application 2, in addition to continuing to migrate the data of Application 2 by performing an operation (such as a click operation) on the electronic device 100 for the option 1031 shown in FIG. 10G, the user can also perform an operation on the electronic device 100. Operations are performed on device 200 to continue migrating the data of application 2.
示例性地,参阅图10D,电子设备200可以检测到用户针对应用程序2的图标的操作(例如长按操作),响应于该操作,电子设备200可以图10K示例性所示的窗口1060,窗口1060中可以包括一个或多个选项(例如选项1061),选项1061可以用于继续迁移应用程序2的数据。For example, referring to FIG. 10D , the electronic device 200 may detect the user's operation (such as a long press operation) on the icon of the application program 2 , and in response to the operation, the electronic device 200 may display the window 1060 as shown in the example of FIG. 10K . One or more options (eg, option 1061) may be included in 1060, and option 1061 may be used to continue migrating application 2's data.
如果用户想要继续迁移应用程序2的数据,那么,电子设备200可以检测到用户针对选项1061的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备200可以继续迁移应用程序2的数据,同时,电子设备200还可以如图10A所示在应用程序2的图标上显示应用程序2的数据的迁移进度提示信息(例如进度条、“待发送”提示条)。此外,电子设备200还可以向电子设备100发送消息,以便通知电子设备100继续接收应用程序2的数据。进一步地,电子设备100在接收到电子设备200发送的上述消息之后,电子设备100可以继续接收应用程序2的数据,同时,电子设备100还可以如图10H所示在应用程序2的图标上显示应用程序2的数据的迁移进度提示信息(例如进度条、“待接收”提示条)。这样,可以便于用户获知应用程序2的数据是否已经成功被继续迁移了。If the user wants to continue migrating the data of application program 2, then the electronic device 200 can detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 1061, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 200 can continue to migrate the data of application program 2, while , as shown in FIG. 10A , the electronic device 200 can also display the migration progress prompt information (such as a progress bar, a "to be sent" prompt bar) of the data of the application program 2 on the icon of the application program 2. In addition, the electronic device 200 may also send a message to the electronic device 100 to notify the electronic device 100 to continue receiving data from the application program 2 . Further, after the electronic device 100 receives the above message sent by the electronic device 200, the electronic device 100 can continue to receive the data of the application program 2. At the same time, the electronic device 100 can also display on the icon of the application program 2 as shown in Figure 10H Migration progress prompt information of application 2's data (such as progress bar, "to be received" prompt bar). In this way, it is convenient for the user to know whether the data of application 2 has been successfully migrated.
图11A-图11I示例性示出了电子设备100和电子设备200以“文件夹的粒度”来停止迁移该文件夹中包括的应用程序的数据的过程中涉及的一系列用户界面。11A-11I exemplarily illustrate a series of user interfaces involved in the process of the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 stopping migrating data of applications included in the folder at a "folder granularity".
参阅图11A,图11A示例性所示的用户界面1110可以为电子设备100的“桌面”应用程序提供的一个用户界面。该用户界面中可以包括一个或多个文件夹(例如文件夹1111、文件夹1112等),这一个或多个文件夹中包括的应用程序可以是电子设备200正在向电子设备100进行数据迁移的应用程序。每一个文 件夹上可以实时显示有该文件夹中包括的应用程序的数据的整体迁移进度提示信息。Referring to FIG. 11A , the user interface 1110 illustrated in FIG. 11A may be a user interface provided by a “desktop” application of the electronic device 100 . The user interface may include one or more folders (such as folder 1111, folder 1112, etc.), and the applications included in this one or more folders may be the applications that the electronic device 200 is migrating to the electronic device 100. app. every article The overall migration progress prompt information of the application data included in the folder can be displayed in real time on the folder.
从图11A中可以看出,文件夹1112中包括的应用程序均正在等待发送数据,即还没有开始发送数据。如果用户想要停止迁移文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据,那么,电子设备200可以检测到用户针对文件夹1112的操作(例如长按操作),响应于该操作,电子设备200可以显示图11B示例性所示的窗口1120,窗口1120中可以包括一个或多个选项(例如选项1121、选项1122),选项1121可以用于将文件夹1112显示为大文件夹,选项1122可以用于停止迁移文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据。As can be seen from FIG. 11A , the applications included in the folder 1112 are all waiting to send data, that is, they have not started sending data yet. If the user wants to stop migrating the data of the application program included in the folder 1112, the electronic device 200 may detect the user's operation (such as a long press operation) on the folder 1112, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 200 may display an image. 11B illustrates the window 1120. The window 1120 can include one or more options (such as option 1121, option 1122). Option 1121 can be used to display the folder 1112 as a large folder, and option 1122 can be used to stop migration. Folder 1112 contains the data of the application.
进一步地,电子设备200可以检测到用户针对图11B所示的选项1122的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备200可以停止迁移文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据,同时,参阅图11C,电子设备200还可以在文件夹1112上取消显示文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据的整体迁移进度提示信息(例如进度条、“待发送”提示条)。这样,可以便于用户获知文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据是否已经成功被停止迁移了。Further, the electronic device 200 may detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 1122 shown in FIG. 11B , and in response to the operation, the electronic device 200 may stop migrating data of the application program included in the folder 1112 , and at the same time, Referring to FIG. 11C , the electronic device 200 can also cancel the display of the overall migration progress prompt information (eg, progress bar, “to be sent” prompt bar) of the data of the application program included in the folder 1112 on the folder 1112 . In this way, it is convenient for the user to know whether the data of the application program included in the folder 1112 has been successfully stopped and migrated.
此外,电子设备200还可以向电子设备100发送消息,以便通知电子设备100停止接收文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据。进一步地,电子设备100在接收到电子设备200发送的上述消息之后,电子设备100可以停止接收文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据,同时,参阅图11D,电子设备100还可以取消显示文件夹1112,或者,参阅图11E,电子设备100还可以将文件夹1112进行灰度化显示,以提示用户文件夹1112处于不可用状态。这样,可以便于用户获知文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据是否已经成功被停止迁移了。In addition, the electronic device 200 may also send a message to the electronic device 100 in order to notify the electronic device 100 to stop receiving data of the application program included in the folder 1112 . Further, after the electronic device 100 receives the above message sent by the electronic device 200, the electronic device 100 can stop receiving data of the application program included in the folder 1112. At the same time, referring to FIG. 11D, the electronic device 100 can also cancel the display of the folder. 1112, or, referring to FIG. 11E, the electronic device 100 can also display the folder 1112 in grayscale to prompt the user that the folder 1112 is in an unavailable state. In this way, it is convenient for the user to know whether the data of the application program included in the folder 1112 has been successfully stopped and migrated.
继续参阅图11E,电子设备100可以检测到用户针对文件夹1112的操作(例如长按操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100可以显示图11F示例性所示的窗口1130,窗口1130中可以包括一个或多个选项(例如选项1131、选项1132、选项1133、选项1134),选项1131可以用于将文件夹1112显示为大文件夹,选项1132可以用于继续迁移文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据,选项1133可以用于从应用市场上下载文件夹1112中包括的应用程序,选项1134可以用于将文件夹1112移除。Continuing to refer to FIG. 11E , the electronic device 100 may detect the user's operation on the folder 1112 (such as a long press operation). In response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may display the window 1130 as exemplarily shown in FIG. 11F , and the window 1130 may include One or more options (e.g., option 1131, option 1132, option 1133, option 1134), option 1131 can be used to display folder 1112 as a large folder, option 1132 can be used to continue migrating applications included in folder 1112 data, option 1133 can be used to download the application included in the folder 1112 from the application market, and option 1134 can be used to remove the folder 1112.
示例性地,如果用户想要继续迁移文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据,那么,电子设备100可以检测到用户针对选项1132的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100可以继续迁移文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据,同时,参阅图11G,电子设备100还可以将文件夹1112取消灰度化显示,并在文件夹1112上显示文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据的整体迁移进度提示信息(例如进度条、“待接收”提示条)。此外,电子设备100还可以向电子设备200发送消息,以便通知电子设备200继续发送文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据。进一步地,电子设备200在接收到电子设备100发送的上述消息之后,电子设备200可以继续发送文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据,同时,电子设备200还可以在文件夹1112上显示文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据的整体迁移进度提示信息(例如进度条、“待发送”提示条)。这样,可以便于用户获知文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据是否已经成功被继续迁移了。For example, if the user wants to continue migrating the data of the application program included in the folder 1112, the electronic device 100 may detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on the option 1132, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may Continue to migrate the data of the applications included in the folder 1112. At the same time, referring to FIG. 11G, the electronic device 100 can also cancel the grayscale display of the folder 1112 and display the data of the applications included in the folder 1112 on the folder 1112. The overall data migration progress prompt information (such as progress bar, "to be received" prompt bar). In addition, the electronic device 100 may also send a message to the electronic device 200 to notify the electronic device 200 to continue sending data of the application program included in the folder 1112 . Further, after the electronic device 200 receives the above message sent by the electronic device 100, the electronic device 200 can continue to send the data of the application program included in the folder 1112. At the same time, the electronic device 200 can also display the folder on the folder 1112. The overall migration progress prompt information of the application data included in 1112 (such as progress bar, "to be sent" prompt bar). In this way, it is convenient for the user to know whether the data of the application program included in the folder 1112 has been successfully migrated.
示例性地,如果用户想要从应用市场上下载文件夹1112中包括的应用程序,那么,电子设备100可以检测到用户针对选项1133的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100可以打开应用市场并下载文件夹1112中包括的应用程序,下载并安装完成后,用户便可以使用文件夹1112中包括的应用程序了。For example, if the user wants to download the application program included in the folder 1112 from the application market, the electronic device 100 may detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 1133, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 The application market can be opened and the applications included in the folder 1112 can be downloaded. After the download and installation are completed, the user can use the applications included in the folder 1112 .
示例性地,如果用户想要将文件夹1112移除,那么,电子设备100可以检测到用户针对选项1134的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100可以如图11D所示取消显示文件夹1112。For example, if the user wants to remove the folder 1112, the electronic device 100 can detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 1134, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 can cancel as shown in FIG. 11D Display folder 1112.
上述以用户通过操作电子设备200为例来介绍实现停止迁移文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据的过程,容易理解,用户也可以通过操作电子设备100来实现停止迁移文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据。The above description uses the user's operation of the electronic device 200 as an example to introduce the process of stopping the migration of the data of the applications included in the folder 1112. It is easy to understand that the user can also stop the migration of the applications included in the folder 1112 by operating the electronic device 100. program data.
参阅图11G,可以看出,文件夹1112中包括的应用程序均正在等待接收数据,即还没有开始接收数据。如果用户想要停止迁移文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据,那么,电子设备100可以检测到用户针对文件夹1112的操作(例如长按操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100可以显示图11H示例性所示的窗口1140,窗口1140中可以包括一个或多个选项(例如选项1141、选项1142),选项1141可以用于将文件夹1112显示为大文件夹,选项1142可以用于停止迁移文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据。Referring to Figure 11G, it can be seen that the applications included in the folder 1112 are all waiting to receive data, that is, they have not started receiving data yet. If the user wants to stop migrating the data of the application program included in the folder 1112, the electronic device 100 may detect the user's operation (such as a long press operation) on the folder 1112, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may display an image. 11H illustrates an exemplary window 1140. The window 1140 may include one or more options (such as option 1141, option 1142). Option 1141 may be used to display the folder 1112 as a large folder, and option 1142 may be used to stop migration. Folder 1112 contains the data of the application.
进一步地,电子设备100可以检测到用户针对图11H所示的选项1142的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100可以停止接收文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据,同时,参阅图11D,电子设备100还可以取消显示文件夹1112,或者,参阅图11E,电子设备100还可以将文件夹1112进行灰度化 显示,以提示用户文件夹1112处于不可用状态。这样,可以便于用户获知文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据是否已经成功被停止迁移了。Further, the electronic device 100 may detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 1142 shown in FIG. 11H, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may stop receiving data of the application program included in the folder 1112, and at the same time, Referring to Figure 11D, the electronic device 100 can also cancel the display of the folder 1112, or, referring to Figure 11E, the electronic device 100 can also grayscale the folder 1112. Displayed to prompt the user that folder 1112 is unavailable. In this way, it is convenient for the user to know whether the data of the application program included in the folder 1112 has been successfully stopped and migrated.
此外,电子设备100还可以向电子设备200发送消息,以便通知电子设备200停止发送文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据。进一步地,电子设备200在接收到电子设备100发送的上述消息之后,电子设备100可以停止发送文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据,同时,参阅图11C,电子设备200还可以在文件夹1112上取消显示文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据的整体迁移进度提示信息(例如进度条、“待发送”提示条)。这样,便于用户获知文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据是否已经成功被停止迁移了。In addition, the electronic device 100 may also send a message to the electronic device 200 in order to notify the electronic device 200 to stop sending data of the application program included in the folder 1112 . Further, after the electronic device 200 receives the above message sent by the electronic device 100, the electronic device 100 can stop sending data of the application program included in the folder 1112. At the same time, referring to FIG. 11C, the electronic device 200 can also Cancel the display of overall migration progress prompt information (for example, progress bar, "to be sent" prompt bar) of the data of the application program included in the folder 1112. In this way, it is convenient for the user to know whether the data of the application program included in the folder 1112 has been successfully migrated.
在停止迁移文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据之后,除了可以通过在电子设备100上针对前述图11F所示的选项1132进行操作(例如点击操作)来继续迁移文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据之外,用户还可以在电子设备200上进行操作来继续迁移文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据。After stopping migrating the data of the application program included in the folder 1112, in addition to continuing to migrate the application program included in the folder 1112 by performing an operation (such as a click operation) on the electronic device 100 for the aforementioned option 1132 shown in FIG. 11F In addition to the data, the user can also perform operations on the electronic device 200 to continue migrating data of the applications included in the folder 1112 .
示例性地,参阅图11C,电子设备200可以检测到用户针对文件夹1112的操作(例如长按操作),响应于该操作,电子设备200可以图11I示例性所示的窗口1150,窗口1150中可以包括一个或多个选项(例如选项1151),选项1151可以用于继续迁移文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据。For example, referring to FIG. 11C , the electronic device 200 may detect the user's operation on the folder 1112 (for example, a long press operation). In response to the operation, the electronic device 200 may display the window 1150 shown in the example of FIG. 11I . In the window 1150 One or more options may be included (eg, option 1151 ) that may be used to continue migrating data for applications included in folder 1112 .
如果用户想要继续迁移文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据,那么,电子设备200可以检测到用户针对选项1151的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备200可以继续迁移文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据,同时,电子设备200还可以如图11A所示在文件夹1112上显示文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据的整体迁移进度提示信息(例如进度条、“待发送”提示条)。此外,电子设备200还可以向电子设备100发送消息,以便通知电子设备100继续接收文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据。进一步地,电子设备100在接收到电子设备200发送的上述消息之后,电子设备100可以继续接收文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据,同时,电子设备100还可以如图11G所示在文件夹1112上显示文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据的整体迁移进度提示信息(例如进度条、“待接收”提示条)。这样,可以便于用户获知文件夹1112中包括的应用程序的数据是否已经成功被继续迁移了。If the user wants to continue migrating the data of the application program included in the folder 1112, the electronic device 200 may detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 1151, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 200 may continue to migrate the folder. 1112. At the same time, the electronic device 200 can also display on the folder 1112, as shown in FIG. 11A, the overall migration progress prompt information (such as a progress bar, "to be Send” prompt). In addition, the electronic device 200 may also send a message to the electronic device 100 to notify the electronic device 100 to continue receiving data of the application program included in the folder 1112 . Further, after the electronic device 100 receives the above message sent by the electronic device 200, the electronic device 100 can continue to receive data of the application program included in the folder 1112. At the same time, the electronic device 100 can also add data to the folder 1112 as shown in FIG. 11G. 1112 displays overall migration progress prompt information (such as a progress bar, a “to be received” prompt bar) of the data of the application program included in the folder 1112 . In this way, it is convenient for the user to know whether the data of the application program included in the folder 1112 has been successfully migrated.
在本申请实施例中,在数据迁移过程中,在“电子设备200上的某一个应用程序的数据向电子设备100发送完成,但是该应用程序的数据还未在电子设备100上克隆完成”的情况下,那么,电子设备200可以显示相关提示信息,以提示用户可以在电子设备200上使用该应用程序,但是该应用程序的数据还未在电子设备100上克隆完成。In the embodiment of the present application, during the data migration process, "the data of a certain application program on the electronic device 200 has been sent to the electronic device 100, but the data of the application program has not been cloned on the electronic device 100." In this case, the electronic device 200 may display relevant prompt information to prompt the user that the application can be used on the electronic device 200 , but the data of the application has not yet been cloned on the electronic device 100 .
下面结合图12A-图12F介绍在“电子设备200上的某一个应用程序的数据向电子设备100发送完成,但是该应用程序的数据还未在电子设备100上克隆完成”的情况下,电子设备200显示相关提示信息的可能的实现方式。The following describes with reference to Figures 12A to 12F the electronic device in the case where "the data of a certain application program on the electronic device 200 has been sent to the electronic device 100, but the data of the application program has not been cloned on the electronic device 100". 200 Possible implementation methods for displaying relevant prompt information.
图12A-图12F示例性示出了在“电子设备200上的某一个应用程序的数据向电子设备100发送完成,但是该应用程序的数据还未在电子设备100上克隆完成”的情况下,电子设备200显示相关提示信息的过程中涉及的一系列用户界面。Figures 12A to 12F exemplarily illustrate the situation in which "the data of a certain application program on the electronic device 200 has been sent to the electronic device 100, but the data of the application program has not been cloned on the electronic device 100." The electronic device 200 displays a series of user interfaces involved in the process of displaying relevant prompt information.
参阅图12A,假设电子设备200上的应用程序2的数据向电子设备100发送完成,那么,在图12A所示的用户界面1210中,电子设备200可以在应用程序2的图标上取消显示应用程序2的数据的迁移进度提示信息(例如进度条、“待发送”提示条或“发送中”提示条),但是,如果应用程序2的数据还未在电子设备100上克隆完成(例如,如图12B所示,电子设备100上的应用程序2还处于“接收中”的状态,也即是说,电子设备100正在接收电子设备200发送的应用程序2的数据,但还未接收完成),那么,电子设备200可以在应用程序2的图标上相关提示信息(例如图12A所示的标识1211),以提示用户可以在电子设备200上使用应用程序2,但是应用程序2的数据还未在电子设备100上克隆完成。Referring to Figure 12A, assuming that the data of application program 2 on electronic device 200 has been sent to electronic device 100, then in user interface 1210 shown in Figure 12A, electronic device 200 can cancel the display of the application program on the icon of application program 2 2’s data migration progress prompt information (such as a progress bar, a “to be sent” prompt bar or a “sending” prompt bar), however, if the data of application 2 has not been cloned on the electronic device 100 (for example, as shown in Figure As shown in 12B, the application program 2 on the electronic device 100 is still in the "receiving" state, that is to say, the electronic device 100 is receiving the data of the application program 2 sent by the electronic device 200, but the reception has not yet been completed), then , the electronic device 200 can display relevant prompt information (such as the logo 1211 shown in FIG. 12A) on the icon of the application program 200 to prompt the user that the application program 2 can be used on the electronic device 200, but the data of the application program 2 has not yet been uploaded to the electronic device 200. Cloning is completed on device 100.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例对标识1211的显示形式(例如形状、显示位置、颜色等)不作限定。例如,标识1211可以是图12A所示的箭头形状,也可以是其他形状(例如圆形);例如,标识1211可以在图12A所示的应用程序2的图标上显示,也可以在应用程序2的图标其他位置(例如应用程序2的图标的上方)显示。It should be noted that the embodiment of the present application does not limit the display form (such as shape, display position, color, etc.) of the logo 1211. For example, the logo 1211 can be in the shape of an arrow as shown in Figure 12A, or in other shapes (such as a circle); for example, the logo 1211 can be displayed on the icon of Application 2 shown in Figure 12A, or can be displayed on the icon of Application 2 The icon is displayed elsewhere (for example, above the icon of Application 2).
可以理解的是,电子设备200上的应用程序2的数据向电子设备100发送完成之后,电子设备200可以向电子设备100获取应用程序2的数据是否在电子设备100上克隆完成的消息,若否,则电子设备200 可以显示图12A中示例性所示的标识1211。It can be understood that after the data of the application program 2 on the electronic device 200 is sent to the electronic device 100, the electronic device 200 can obtain a message from the electronic device 100 whether the data of the application program 2 has been cloned on the electronic device 100. If not, , then the electronic device 200 The logo 1211 shown exemplarily in FIG. 12A may be displayed.
由于电子设备200上的应用程序2的数据向电子设备100发送完成之后,用户就可以使用应用程序2了,如果用户在使用应用程序2期间又产生了新的数据(例如新的用户数据),那么,电子设备200可以支持继续将上述产生的新的数据迁移到电子设备100。Since the data of application program 2 on electronic device 200 is sent to electronic device 100, the user can use application program 2. If the user generates new data (such as new user data) while using application program 2, Then, the electronic device 200 can support continuing to migrate the new data generated above to the electronic device 100 .
参阅图12C,如果用户在使用应用程序2期间又产生了新的数据,那么,电子设备200可以在应用程序2的图标上显示相关提示信息(例如标识1212),以提示用户应用程序2产生了新的数据。Referring to Figure 12C, if the user generates new data while using application 2, the electronic device 200 can display relevant prompt information (such as identification 1212) on the icon of application 2 to remind the user that application 2 has generated new data.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例对标识1212的显示形式(例如形状、显示位置、颜色等)不作限定。例如,标识1212可以是图12C所示的圆形形状,也可以是其他形状(例如方形);例如,标识1212可以在图12C所示的应用程序2的图标上显示,也可以在应用程序2的图标其他位置(例如应用程序2的图标的上方)显示。It should be noted that the embodiment of the present application does not limit the display form (such as shape, display position, color, etc.) of the logo 1212. For example, the logo 1212 may be in a circular shape as shown in FIG. 12C , or may be in other shapes (such as a square); for example, the logo 1212 may be displayed on the icon of Application 2 shown in FIG. 12C , or may be displayed on the icon of Application 2 The icon is displayed elsewhere (for example, above the icon of Application 2).
继续参阅图12C,电子设备200可以检测到用户针对应用程序2的图标的操作(例如长按操作),响应于该操作,电子设备200可以显示图12D示例性所示的窗口1220,窗口1220中可以包括一个或多个选项(例如选项1221、选项1222),选项1221可以用于继续将上述应用程序2产生的新的数据迁移到电子设备100,选项1222可以用于不再将上述应用程序2产生的新的数据迁移到电子设备100。Continuing to refer to FIG. 12C , the electronic device 200 may detect the user's operation (such as a long press operation) on the icon of the application 2 , and in response to the operation, the electronic device 200 may display the window 1220 exemplarily shown in FIG. 12D . In the window 1220 One or more options (for example, option 1221, option 1222) may be included. Option 1221 may be used to continue migrating new data generated by the above-mentioned application program 2 to the electronic device 100. Option 1222 may be used to no longer migrate the above-mentioned application program 2 to the electronic device 100. The generated new data is migrated to the electronic device 100 .
示例性地,如果用户想要继续将上述应用程序2产生的新的数据迁移到电子设备100,那么,电子设备200可以检测到用户针对选项1221的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备200可以继续将上述应用程序2产生的新的数据迁移到电子设备100,同时,电子设备200可以显示图12E示例性所示的应用程序2产生的新的数据的迁移进度提示信息(例如进度条、“发送中”提示条),以便用户获知上述应用程序2产生的新的数据是否成功向电子设备100进行迁移了。For example, if the user wants to continue to migrate new data generated by the above-mentioned application program 2 to the electronic device 100, then the electronic device 200 can detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 1221, and in response to the operation, The electronic device 200 can continue to migrate the new data generated by the application program 2 to the electronic device 100. At the same time, the electronic device 200 can display the migration progress prompt information of the new data generated by the application program 2 as shown in FIG. 12E (for example, Progress bar, "Sending" prompt bar), so that the user can know whether the new data generated by the application program 2 has been successfully migrated to the electronic device 100.
示例性地,如果用户不想要再将上述应用程序2产生的新的数据迁移到电子设备100,那么,电子设备200可以检测到用户针对选项1222的操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备200可以不再将上述应用程序2产生的新的数据迁移到电子设备100,同时,电子设备200可以取消显示图12C示例性所示的标识1212。For example, if the user does not want to migrate new data generated by the above-mentioned application program 2 to the electronic device 100, then the electronic device 200 can detect the user's operation (such as a click operation) on option 1222, and in response to the operation, The electronic device 200 may no longer migrate new data generated by the application program 2 to the electronic device 100. At the same time, the electronic device 200 may cancel displaying the logo 1212 exemplarily shown in FIG. 12C.
在一些示例中,如果用户在使用应用程序2期间又产生了新的数据,那么,电子设备200也可以自动显示图12F示例性所示的窗口1230,窗口1230可以用于提示用户应用程序2产生了新的数据,是否需要继续将上述应用程序2产生的新的数据迁移到电子设备100。In some examples, if the user generates new data while using the application 2, the electronic device 200 can also automatically display the window 1230 illustratively shown in FIG. 12F. The window 1230 can be used to prompt the user that the application 2 generates new data. If new data is generated, whether it is necessary to continue migrating the new data generated by the above-mentioned application program 2 to the electronic device 100 .
若是(例如用户点击了窗口1230中的“是”选项),那么,电子设备200可以继续将上述应用程序2产生的新的数据迁移到电子设备100,同时,电子设备200可以显示图12E示例性所示的应用程序2产生的新的数据的迁移进度提示信息(例如进度条、“发送中”提示条),以便用户获知上述应用程序2产生的新的数据是否成功向电子设备100进行迁移了。If so (for example, the user clicks the "Yes" option in the window 1230), then the electronic device 200 can continue to migrate the new data generated by the above-mentioned application program 2 to the electronic device 100, and at the same time, the electronic device 200 can display the example shown in FIG. 12E The shown migration progress prompt information (such as a progress bar, a "sending" prompt bar) of the new data generated by the application program 2 is so that the user can know whether the new data generated by the application program 2 has been successfully migrated to the electronic device 100 .
若否(例如用户点击了窗口1230中的“否”选项),那么,电子设备200可以不再将上述应用程序2产生的新的数据迁移到电子设备100。If not (for example, the user clicks the "No" option in the window 1230), then the electronic device 200 may no longer migrate the new data generated by the application program 2 to the electronic device 100.
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备100的软件结构。The software structure of the electronic device 100 provided by the embodiment of the present application is introduced below.
图13示例性示出了本申请实施例中提供的一种电子设备100的软件结构。Figure 13 schematically shows the software structure of an electronic device 100 provided in the embodiment of the present application.
如图13所示,电子设备100的软件系统可以采用分层架构,事件驱动架构,微核架构,微服务架构,或云架构。本申请实施例以分层架构的Android系统为例,示例性说明电子设备100的软件结构。As shown in Figure 13, the software system of the electronic device 100 may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a microkernel architecture, a microservice architecture, or a cloud architecture. The embodiment of this application takes the Android system with a layered architecture as an example to illustrate the software structure of the electronic device 100 .
分层架构将软件分成若干个层,每一层都有清晰的角色和分工。层与层之间通过软件接口通信。在一些示例中,将Android系统分为四层,从上至下分别为应用程序层,应用程序框架层,安卓运行时(Android runtime)和系统库,以及内核层。The layered architecture divides the software into several layers, and each layer has clear roles and division of labor. The layers communicate through software interfaces. In some examples, the Android system is divided into four layers, from top to bottom: application layer, application framework layer, Android runtime and system libraries, and kernel layer.
应用程序层可以包括一系列应用程序包。The application layer can include a series of application packages.
如图13所示,应用程序包可以包括相机,图库,日历,通话,地图,手机克隆,WLAN,蓝牙,音乐,设置,短信息等应用程序。As shown in Figure 13, the application package can include camera, gallery, calendar, call, map, phone clone, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, settings, SMS and other applications.
其中,“手机克隆”应用程序可以用于将本端设备上的应用程序的数据迁移到另一个电子设备上,具体过程可以参照前述各个实施例中的内容,在此不再赘述。 Among them, the "mobile phone cloning" application can be used to migrate application data on the local device to another electronic device. The specific process can be referred to the content in the aforementioned embodiments, and will not be described again here.
在一些示例中,“手机克隆”应用程序实现的功能也可以集成在“设置”应用程序中,或者,也可以通过“设置”应用程序提供的入口来调用“手机克隆”应用程序。In some examples, the functions implemented by the "Phone Clone" application can also be integrated in the "Settings" application, or the "Phone Clone" application can also be called through the entrance provided by the "Settings" application.
需要说明的是,“手机克隆”应用程序的名称仅为本申请实施例所使用的词语,其代表的含义在本申请实施例中已经记载,其名称并不能对本申请实施例构成任何限制。It should be noted that the name of the "Mobile Clone" application is only a word used in the embodiments of this application, and its meaning has been recorded in the embodiments of this application. Its name does not constitute any limitation on the embodiments of this application.
应用程序框架层为应用程序层的应用程序提供应用编程接口(application programming interface,API)和编程框架。应用程序框架层包括一些预先定义的函数。The application framework layer provides an application programming interface (API) and programming framework for applications in the application layer. The application framework layer includes some predefined functions.
如图13所示,应用程序框架层可以包括窗口管理器,内容提供器,视图系统,电话管理器,资源管理器,通知管理器等。As shown in Figure 13, the application framework layer can include a window manager, content provider, view system, phone manager, resource manager, notification manager, etc.
窗口管理器用于管理窗口程序。窗口管理器可以获取显示屏大小,判断是否有状态栏,锁定屏幕,截取屏幕等。A window manager is used to manage window programs. The window manager can obtain the display size, determine whether there is a status bar, lock the screen, capture the screen, etc.
内容提供器用来存放和获取数据,并使这些数据可以被应用程序访问。所述数据可以包括视频,图像,音频,拨打和接听的电话,浏览历史和书签,电话簿等。Content providers are used to store and retrieve data and make this data accessible to applications. Said data can include videos, images, audio, calls made and received, browsing history and bookmarks, phone books, etc.
视图系统包括可视控件,例如显示文字的控件,显示图片的控件等。视图系统可用于构建应用程序。显示界面可以由一个或多个视图组成的。例如,包括短信通知图标的显示界面,可以包括显示文字的视图以及显示图片的视图。The view system includes visual controls, such as controls that display text, controls that display pictures, etc. A view system can be used to build applications. The display interface can be composed of one or more views. For example, a display interface including a text message notification icon may include a view for displaying text and a view for displaying pictures.
电话管理器用于提供电子设备100的通信功能。例如通话状态的管理(包括接通,挂断等)。The phone manager is used to provide communication functions of the electronic device 100 . For example, call status management (including connected, hung up, etc.).
资源管理器为应用程序提供各种资源,比如本地化字符串,图标,图片,布局文件,视频文件等等。The resource manager provides various resources to applications, such as localized strings, icons, pictures, layout files, video files, etc.
通知管理器使应用程序可以在状态栏中显示通知信息,可以用于传达告知类型的消息,可以短暂停留后自动消失,无需用户交互。比如通知管理器被用于告知下载完成,消息提醒等。通知管理器还可以是以图表或者滚动条文本形式出现在系统顶部状态栏的通知,例如后台运行的应用程序的通知,还可以是以对话窗口形式出现在屏幕上的通知。例如在状态栏提示文本信息,发出提示音,电子设备振动,指示灯闪烁等。The notification manager allows applications to display notification information in the status bar, which can be used to convey notification-type messages and can automatically disappear after a short stay without user interaction. For example, the notification manager is used to notify download completion, message reminders, etc. The notification manager can also be notifications that appear in the status bar at the top of the system in the form of charts or scroll bar text, such as notifications for applications running in the background, or notifications that appear on the screen in the form of conversation windows. For example, text information is prompted in the status bar, a beep sounds, the electronic device vibrates, the indicator light flashes, etc.
Android Runtime包括核心库和虚拟机。Android runtime负责安卓系统的调度和管理。Android Runtime includes core libraries and virtual machines. Android runtime is responsible for the scheduling and management of the Android system.
核心库包含两部分:一部分是java语言需要调用的功能函数,另一部分是安卓的核心库。The core library contains two parts: one is the functional functions that need to be called by the Java language, and the other is the core library of Android.
应用程序层和应用程序框架层运行在虚拟机中。虚拟机将应用程序层和应用程序框架层的java文件执行为二进制文件。虚拟机用于执行对象生命周期的管理,堆栈管理,线程管理,安全和异常的管理,以及垃圾回收等功能。The application layer and application framework layer run in virtual machines. The virtual machine executes the java files of the application layer and application framework layer into binary files. The virtual machine is used to perform object life cycle management, stack management, thread management, security and exception management, and garbage collection and other functions.
系统库可以包括多个功能模块。例如:表面管理器(surface manager),媒体库(Media Libraries),三维图形处理库(例如:OpenGL ES),2D图形引擎(例如:SGL)等。System libraries can include multiple functional modules. For example: surface manager (surface manager), media libraries (Media Libraries), 3D graphics processing libraries (for example: OpenGL ES), 2D graphics engines (for example: SGL), etc.
表面管理器用于对显示子系统进行管理,并且为多个应用程序提供了2D和3D图层的融合。The surface manager is used to manage the display subsystem and provides the fusion of 2D and 3D layers for multiple applications.
媒体库支持多种常用的音频,视频格式回放和录制,以及静态图像文件等。媒体库可以支持多种音视频编码格式,例如:MPEG4,H.264,MP3,AAC,AMR,JPG,PNG等。The media library supports playback and recording of a variety of commonly used audio and video formats, as well as static image files, etc. The media library can support a variety of audio and video encoding formats, such as: MPEG4, H.264, MP3, AAC, AMR, JPG, PNG, etc.
三维图形处理库用于实现三维图形绘图,图像渲染,合成,和图层处理等。The 3D graphics processing library is used to implement 3D graphics drawing, image rendering, composition, and layer processing.
2D图形引擎是2D绘图的绘图引擎。2D Graphics Engine is a drawing engine for 2D drawing.
内核层是硬件和软件之间的层。内核层至少包含显示驱动,摄像头驱动,蓝牙驱动,传感器驱动。The kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software. The kernel layer contains at least display driver, camera driver, Bluetooth driver, and sensor driver.
下面结合捕获拍照场景,示例性说明电子设备100软件以及硬件的工作流程。The following exemplifies the workflow of the software and hardware of the electronic device 100 in conjunction with capturing the photographing scene.
当触摸传感器180K接收到触摸操作,相应的硬件中断被发给内核层。内核层将触摸操作加工成原始输入事件(包括触摸坐标,触摸操作的时间戳等信息)。原始输入事件被存储在内核层。应用程序框架层从内核层获取原始输入事件,识别该输入事件所对应的控件。以该触摸操作是触摸单击操作,该单击操作所对应的控件为相机应用图标的控件为例,相机应用调用应用框架层的接口,启动相机应用,进而通过调用内核层启动摄像头驱动,通过摄像头193捕获静态图像或视频。When the touch sensor 180K receives a touch operation, the corresponding hardware interrupt is sent to the kernel layer. The kernel layer processes touch operations into raw input events (including touch coordinates, timestamps of touch operations, and other information). Raw input events are stored in the kernel layer. The application framework layer obtains the original input event from the kernel layer and identifies the control corresponding to the input event. Taking the touch operation as a touch click operation and the control corresponding to the click operation as a camera application icon control as an example, the camera application calls the interface of the application framework layer to start the camera application, and then starts the camera driver by calling the kernel layer. Camera 193 captures still images or video.
其中,电子设备200的软件结构可以与电子设备100的软件结构相同或相似,关于电子设备200的软件结构的相关内容可以参照图13所示的电子设备100的软件结构的相关文字描述,在此不再赘述。The software structure of the electronic device 200 may be the same as or similar to the software structure of the electronic device 100. For relevant content about the software structure of the electronic device 200, refer to the relevant text description of the software structure of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 13. Herein No longer.
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备100的结构示意图。The following is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 100 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图14示例性示出了本申请实施例中提供的一种电子设备100的结构。FIG. 14 schematically shows the structure of an electronic device 100 provided in the embodiment of the present application.
如图14所示,电子设备100可以包括:处理器110,外部存储器接口120,内部存储器121,通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口130,充电管理模块140,电源管理模块141,电池142,天线1,天 线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,传感器模块180,按键190,马达191,指示器192,摄像头193,显示屏194,以及用户标识模块(subscriber identification module,SIM)卡接口195等。其中传感器模块180可以包括压力传感器180A,陀螺仪传感器180B,气压传感器180C,磁传感器180D,加速度传感器180E,距离传感器180F,接近光传感器180G,指纹传感器180H,温度传感器180J,触摸传感器180K,环境光传感器180L,骨传导传感器180M等。As shown in Figure 14, the electronic device 100 may include: a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, and a battery. 142, antenna 1, sky Line 2, mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, headphone interface 170D, sensor module 180, button 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194 , and subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195, etc. The sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyro sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, and ambient light. Sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
可以理解的是,本申请实施例示意的结构并不构成对电子设备100的具体限定。在本申请另一些示例中,电子设备100可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者拆分某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件,软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。It can be understood that the structure illustrated in the embodiment of the present application does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100 . In other examples of this application, the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than shown in the figures, or combine some components, or split some components, or arrange different components. The components illustrated may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
处理器110可以包括一个或多个处理单元,例如:处理器110可以包括应用处理器(application processor,AP),调制解调处理器,图形处理器(graphics processing unit,GPU),图像信号处理器(image signal processor,ISP),控制器,存储器,视频编解码器,数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP),基带处理器,和/或神经网络处理器(neural-network processing unit,NPU)等。其中,不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件,也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中。The processor 110 may include one or more processing units. For example, the processor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (GPU), and an image signal processor. (image signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural-network processing unit (NPU) wait. Among them, different processing units can be independent devices or integrated in one or more processors.
其中,控制器可以是电子设备100的神经中枢和指挥中心。控制器可以根据指令操作码和时序信号,产生操作控制信号,完成取指令和执行指令的控制。The controller may be the nerve center and command center of the electronic device 100 . The controller can generate operation control signals based on the instruction operation code and timing signals to complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
处理器110中还可以设置存储器,用于存储指令和数据。在一些示例中,处理器110中的存储器为高速缓冲存储器。该存储器可以保存处理器110刚用过或循环使用的指令或数据。如果处理器110需要再次使用该指令或数据,可从所述存储器中直接调用。避免了重复存取,减少了处理器110的等待时间,因而提高了系统的效率。The processor 110 may also be provided with a memory for storing instructions and data. In some examples, the memory in processor 110 is cache memory. This memory may hold instructions or data that have been recently used or recycled by processor 110 . If the processor 110 needs to use the instructions or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated access is avoided and the waiting time of the processor 110 is reduced, thus improving the efficiency of the system.
在一些示例中,处理器110可以包括一个或多个接口。接口可以包括集成电路(inter-integrated circuit,I2C)接口,集成电路内置音频(inter-integrated circuit sound,I2S)接口,脉冲编码调制(pulse code modulation,PCM)接口,通用异步收发传输器(universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter,UART)接口,移动产业处理器接口(mobile industry processor interface,MIPI),通用输入输出(general-purpose input/output,GPIO)接口,用户标识模块(subscriber identity module,SIM)接口,和/或通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口等。In some examples, processor 110 may include one or more interfaces. Interfaces may include integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interface, pulse code modulation (pulse code modulation, PCM) interface, universal asynchronous receiver and transmitter (universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (MIPI), general-purpose input/output (GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and /or universal serial bus (USB) interface, etc.
I2C接口是一种双向同步串行总线,包括一根串行数据线(serial data line,SDA)和一根串行时钟线(derail clock line,SCL)。在一些示例中,处理器110可以包含多组I2C总线。处理器110可以通过不同的I2C总线接口分别耦合触摸传感器180K,充电器,闪光灯,摄像头193等。例如:处理器110可以通过I2C接口耦合触摸传感器180K,使处理器110与触摸传感器180K通过I2C总线接口通信,实现电子设备100的触摸功能。The I2C interface is a bidirectional synchronous serial bus, including a serial data line (SDA) and a serial clock line (derail clock line, SCL). In some examples, processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2C buses. The processor 110 can separately couple the touch sensor 180K, charger, flash, camera 193, etc. through different I2C bus interfaces. For example, the processor 110 can be coupled to the touch sensor 180K through an I2C interface, so that the processor 110 and the touch sensor 180K communicate through the I2C bus interface to implement the touch function of the electronic device 100 .
I2S接口可以用于音频通信。在一些示例中,处理器110可以包含多组I2S总线。处理器110可以通过I2S总线与音频模块170耦合,实现处理器110与音频模块170之间的通信。在一些示例中,音频模块170可以通过I2S接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。The I2S interface can be used for audio communication. In some examples, processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2S buses. The processor 110 can be coupled with the audio module 170 through the I2S bus to implement communication between the processor 110 and the audio module 170 . In some examples, the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the I2S interface to implement the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset.
PCM接口也可以用于音频通信,将模拟信号抽样,量化和编码。在一些示例中,音频模块170与无线通信模块160可以通过PCM总线接口耦合。在一些示例中,音频模块170也可以通过PCM接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。所述I2S接口和所述PCM接口都可以用于音频通信。The PCM interface can also be used for audio communications to sample, quantize and encode analog signals. In some examples, audio module 170 and wireless communication module 160 may be coupled through a PCM bus interface. In some examples, the audio module 170 can also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the PCM interface to implement the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset. Both the I2S interface and the PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
UART接口是一种通用串行数据总线,用于异步通信。该总线可以为双向通信总线。它将要传输的数据在串行通信与并行通信之间转换。在一些示例中,UART接口通常被用于连接处理器110与无线通信模块160。例如:处理器110通过UART接口与无线通信模块160中的蓝牙模块通信,实现蓝牙功能。在一些示例中,音频模块170可以通过UART接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机播放音乐的功能。The UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication. The bus can be a bidirectional communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication. In some examples, a UART interface is typically used to connect the processor 110 and the wireless communication module 160 . For example, the processor 110 communicates with the Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to implement the Bluetooth function. In some examples, the audio module 170 can transmit the audio signal to the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to implement the function of playing music through the Bluetooth headset.
MIPI接口可以被用于连接处理器110与显示屏194,摄像头193等外围器件。MIPI接口包括摄像头串行接口(camera serial interface,CSI),显示屏串行接口(display serial interface,DSI)等。在一些示例中,处理器110和摄像头193通过CSI接口通信,实现电子设备100的拍摄功能。处理器110和显示屏194通过DSI接口通信,实现电子设备100的显示功能。The MIPI interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with peripheral devices such as the display screen 194 and the camera 193 . MIPI interfaces include camera serial interface (CSI), display serial interface (DSI), etc. In some examples, the processor 110 and the camera 193 communicate through a CSI interface to implement the shooting function of the electronic device 100 . The processor 110 and the display screen 194 communicate through the DSI interface to implement the display function of the electronic device 100 .
GPIO接口可以通过软件配置。GPIO接口可以被配置为控制信号,也可被配置为数据信号。在一些示例中,GPIO接口可以用于连接处理器110与摄像头193,显示屏194,无线通信模块160,音频模块170,传感器模块180等。GPIO接口还可以被配置为I2C接口,I2S接口,UART接口,MIPI接口等。 The GPIO interface can be configured through software. The GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or as a data signal. In some examples, the GPIO interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with the camera 193, display screen 194, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, sensor module 180, etc. The GPIO interface can also be configured as an I2C interface, I2S interface, UART interface, MIPI interface, etc.
USB接口130是符合USB标准规范的接口,具体可以是Mini USB接口,Micro USB接口,USB Type C接口等。USB接口130可以用于连接充电器为电子设备100充电,也可以用于电子设备100与外围设备之间传输数据。也可以用于连接耳机,通过耳机播放音频。该接口还可以用于连接其他终端设备,例如AR设备等。The USB interface 130 is an interface that complies with the USB standard specification, and may be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, etc. The USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 100, and can also be used to transmit data between the electronic device 100 and peripheral devices. It can also be used to connect headphones to play audio through them. This interface can also be used to connect other terminal devices, such as AR devices.
可以理解的是,本申请实施例示意的各模块间的接口连接关系,只是示意性说明,并不构成对电子设备100的结构限定。在本申请另一些示例中,电子设备100也可以采用上述实施例中不同的接口连接方式,或多种接口连接方式的组合。It can be understood that the interface connection relationships between the modules illustrated in the embodiments of the present application are only schematic illustrations and do not constitute a structural limitation of the electronic device 100 . In other examples of this application, the electronic device 100 may also adopt different interface connection methods in the above embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection methods.
充电管理模块140用于从充电器接收充电输入。其中,充电器可以是无线充电器,也可以是有线充电器。在一些有线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块140可以通过USB接口130接收有线充电器的充电输入。在一些无线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块140可以通过电子设备100的无线充电线圈接收无线充电输入。充电管理模块140为电池142充电的同时,还可以通过电源管理模块141为电子设备100供电。The charging management module 140 is used to receive charging input from the charger. Among them, the charger can be a wireless charger or a wired charger. In some wired charging embodiments, the charging management module 140 may receive charging input from the wired charger through the USB interface 130 . In some wireless charging embodiments, the charging management module 140 may receive wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the electronic device 100 . While the charging management module 140 charges the battery 142, it can also provide power to the electronic device 100 through the power management module 141.
电源管理模块141用于连接电池142,充电管理模块140与处理器110。电源管理模块141接收电池142和/或充电管理模块140的输入,为处理器110,内部存储器121,外部存储器,显示屏194,摄像头193,和无线通信模块160等供电。电源管理模块141还可以用于监测电池容量,电池循环次数,电池健康状态(漏电,阻抗)等参数。在其他一些实施例中,电源管理模块141也可以设置于处理器110中。在另一些示例中,电源管理模块141和充电管理模块140也可以设置于同一个器件中。The power management module 141 is used to connect the battery 142, the charging management module 140 and the processor 110. The power management module 141 receives input from the battery 142 and/or the charging management module 140, and supplies power to the processor 110, internal memory 121, external memory, display screen 194, camera 193, wireless communication module 160, etc. The power management module 141 can also be used to monitor battery capacity, battery cycle times, battery health status (leakage, impedance) and other parameters. In some other embodiments, the power management module 141 may also be provided in the processor 110 . In other examples, the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 may also be provided in the same device.
电子设备100的无线通信功能可以通过天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,调制解调处理器以及基带处理器等实现。The wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be implemented through the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 150, the wireless communication module 160, the modem processor and the baseband processor.
天线1和天线2用于发射和接收电磁波信号。电子设备100中的每个天线可用于覆盖单个或多个通信频带。不同的天线还可以复用,以提高天线的利用率。例如:可以将天线1复用为无线局域网的分集天线。在另外一些实施例中,天线可以和调谐开关结合使用。Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals. Each antenna in electronic device 100 may be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization. For example: Antenna 1 can be reused as a diversity antenna for a wireless LAN. In other embodiments, antennas may be used in conjunction with tuning switches.
移动通信模块150可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括2G/3G/4G/5G等无线通信的解决方案。移动通信模块150可以包括至少一个滤波器,开关,功率放大器,低噪声放大器(low noise amplifier,LNA)等。移动通信模块150可以由天线1接收电磁波,并对接收的电磁波进行滤波,放大等处理,传送至调制解调处理器进行解调。移动通信模块150还可以对经调制解调处理器调制后的信号放大,经天线1转为电磁波辐射出去。在一些示例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以被设置于处理器110中。在一些示例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以与处理器110的至少部分模块被设置在同一个器件中。The mobile communication module 150 can provide solutions for wireless communication including 2G/3G/4G/5G applied on the electronic device 100 . The mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (LNA), etc. The mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1, perform filtering, amplification and other processing on the received electromagnetic waves, and transmit them to the modem processor for demodulation. The mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modem processor and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1 for radiation. In some examples, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be disposed in the processor 110 . In some examples, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be provided in the same device as at least part of the modules of the processor 110 .
调制解调处理器可以包括调制器和解调器。其中,调制器用于将待发送的低频基带信号调制成中高频信号。解调器用于将接收的电磁波信号解调为低频基带信号。随后解调器将解调得到的低频基带信号传送至基带处理器处理。低频基带信号经基带处理器处理后,被传递给应用处理器。应用处理器通过音频设备(不限于扬声器170A,受话器170B等)输出声音信号,或通过显示屏194显示图像或视频。在一些示例中,调制解调处理器可以是独立的器件。在另一些示例中,调制解调处理器可以独立于处理器110,与移动通信模块150或其他功能模块设置在同一个器件中。A modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator. Among them, the modulator is used to modulate the low-frequency baseband signal to be sent into a medium-high frequency signal. The demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low-frequency baseband signal. The demodulator then transmits the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing. After the low-frequency baseband signal is processed by the baseband processor, it is passed to the application processor. The application processor outputs sound signals through audio devices (not limited to speaker 170A, receiver 170B, etc.), or displays images or videos through display screen 194. In some examples, the modem processor may be a stand-alone device. In other examples, the modem processor may be independent of the processor 110 and may be provided in the same device as the mobile communication module 150 or other functional modules.
无线通信模块160可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)(如无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)网络),蓝牙(bluetooth,BT),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GNSS),调频(frequency modulation,FM),近距离无线通信技术(near field communication,NFC),红外技术(infrared,IR)等无线通信的解决方案。无线通信模块160可以是集成至少一个通信处理模块的一个或多个器件。无线通信模块160经由天线2接收电磁波,将电磁波信号调频以及滤波处理,将处理后的信号发送到处理器110。无线通信模块160还可以从处理器110接收待发送的信号,对其进行调频,放大,经天线2转为电磁波辐射出去。The wireless communication module 160 can provide applications on the electronic device 100 including wireless local area networks (WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) network), Bluetooth (bluetooth, BT), and global navigation satellites. System (global navigation satellite system, GNSS), frequency modulation (frequency modulation, FM), near field communication technology (near field communication, NFC), infrared technology (infrared, IR) and other wireless communication solutions. The wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module. The wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110 . The wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110, frequency modulate it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 2 for radiation.
在一些示例中,电子设备100的天线1和移动通信模块150耦合,天线2和无线通信模块160耦合,使得电子设备100可以通过无线通信技术与网络以及其他设备通信。所述无线通信技术可以包括全球移动通讯系统(global system for mobile communications,GSM),通用分组无线服务(general packet radio service,GPRS),码分多址接入(code division multiple access,CDMA),宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA),时分码分多址(time-division code division multiple access,TD-SCDMA),长期演进(long term evolution,LTE),BT,GNSS,WLAN,NFC,FM,和/或IR技术等。所述GNSS可以包括全球卫星定位系统(global positioning system,GPS),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GLONASS),北斗卫星导航系统(beidou navigation satellite system,BDS),准天顶卫星系统(quasi-zenith satellite system,QZSS)和/或星基增强系统(satellite based augmentation systems,SBAS)。 In some examples, the antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 is coupled to the mobile communication module 150, and the antenna 2 is coupled to the wireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device 100 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology. The wireless communication technology may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access (CDMA), broadband Code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), time-division code division multiple access (TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and/or IR technology, etc. The GNSS may include global positioning system (GPS), global navigation satellite system (GLONASS), Beidou navigation satellite system (BDS), quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi -zenith satellite system (QZSS) and/or satellite based augmentation systems (SBAS).
电子设备100通过GPU,显示屏194,以及应用处理器等实现显示功能。GPU为图像处理的微处理器,连接显示屏194和应用处理器。GPU用于执行数学和几何计算,用于图形渲染。处理器110可包括一个或多个GPU,其执行程序指令以生成或改变显示信息。The electronic device 100 implements display functions through a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like. The GPU is an image processing microprocessor and is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor. GPUs are used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering. Processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or alter display information.
显示屏194用于显示图像,视频等。显示屏194包括显示面板。显示面板可以采用液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display,LCD),有机发光二极管(organic light-emitting diode,OLED),有源矩阵有机发光二极体或主动矩阵有机发光二极体(active-matrix organic light emitting diode的,AMOLED),柔性发光二极管(flex light-emitting diode,FLED),Miniled,MicroLed,Micro-oLed,量子点发光二极管(quantum dot light emitting diodes,QLED)等。在一些示例中,电子设备100可以包括1个或N个显示屏194,N为大于1的正整数。The display screen 194 is used to display images, videos, etc. Display 194 includes a display panel. The display panel can use a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active matrix organic light emitting diode or an active matrix organic light emitting diode (active-matrix organic light emitting diode). emitting diode (AMOLED), flexible light-emitting diode (FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light emitting diode (QLED), etc. In some examples, the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N display screens 194, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
电子设备100可以通过ISP,摄像头193,视频编解码器,GPU,显示屏194以及应用处理器等实现拍摄功能。The electronic device 100 can implement the shooting function through an ISP, a camera 193, a video codec, a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like.
ISP用于处理摄像头193反馈的数据。例如,拍照时,打开快门,光线通过镜头被传递到摄像头感光元件上,光信号转换为电信号,摄像头感光元件将所述电信号传递给ISP处理,转化为肉眼可见的图像。ISP还可以对图像的噪点,亮度等进行算法优化。ISP还可以对拍摄场景的曝光,色温等参数优化。在一些示例中,ISP可以设置在摄像头193中。The ISP is used to process the data fed back by the camera 193. For example, when taking a photo, the shutter is opened, the light is transmitted to the camera sensor through the lens, the optical signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the camera sensor passes the electrical signal to the ISP for processing, and converts it into an image visible to the naked eye. ISP can also perform algorithm optimization on image noise, brightness, etc. ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene. In some examples, the ISP may be located in the camera 193.
摄像头193用于捕获静态图像或视频。物体通过镜头生成光学图像投射到感光元件。感光元件可以是电荷耦合器件(charge coupled device,CCD)或互补金属氧化物半导体(complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor,CMOS)光电晶体管。感光元件把光信号转换成电信号,之后将电信号传递给ISP转换成数字图像信号。ISP将数字图像信号输出到DSP加工处理。DSP将数字图像信号转换成标准的RGB,YUV等格式的图像信号。在一些示例中,电子设备100可以包括1个或N个摄像头193,N为大于1的正整数。Camera 193 is used to capture still images or video. The object passes through the lens to produce an optical image that is projected onto the photosensitive element. The photosensitive element can be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor. The photosensitive element converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and then passes the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal. ISP outputs digital image signals to DSP for processing. DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other format image signals. In some examples, the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N cameras 193, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
数字信号处理器用于处理数字信号,除了可以处理数字图像信号,还可以处理其他数字信号。例如,当电子设备100在频点选择时,数字信号处理器用于对频点能量进行傅里叶变换等。Digital signal processors are used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, they can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 100 selects a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the frequency point energy.
视频编解码器用于对数字视频压缩或解压缩。电子设备100可以支持一种或多种视频编解码器。这样,电子设备100可以播放或录制多种编码格式的视频,例如:动态图像专家组(moving picture experts group,MPEG)1,MPEG2,MPEG3,MPEG4等。Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video. Electronic device 100 may support one or more video codecs. In this way, the electronic device 100 can play or record videos in multiple encoding formats, such as moving picture experts group (MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4, etc.
NPU为神经网络(neural-network,NN)计算处理器,通过借鉴生物神经网络结构,例如借鉴人脑神经元之间传递模式,对输入信息快速处理,还可以不断的自学习。通过NPU可以实现电子设备100的智能认知等应用,例如:图像识别,人脸识别,语音识别,文本理解等。NPU is a neural network (NN) computing processor. By drawing on the structure of biological neural networks, such as the transmission mode between neurons in the human brain, it can quickly process input information and can continuously learn by itself. Intelligent cognitive applications of the electronic device 100 can be implemented through the NPU, such as image recognition, face recognition, speech recognition, text understanding, etc.
外部存储器接口120可以用于连接外部存储卡,例如Micro SD卡,实现扩展电子设备100的存储能力。外部存储卡通过外部存储器接口120与处理器110通信,实现数据存储功能。例如将音乐,视频等文件保存在外部存储卡中。The external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100. The external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to implement the data storage function. Such as saving music, videos, etc. files in external memory card.
内部存储器121可以用于存储计算机可执行程序代码,所述可执行程序代码包括指令。处理器110通过运行存储在内部存储器121的指令,从而执行电子设备100的各种功能应用以及数据处理。内部存储器121可以包括存储程序区和存储数据区。其中,存储程序区可存储操作系统,至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能,图像播放功能等)等。存储数据区可存储电子设备100使用过程中所创建的数据(比如音频数据,电话本等)等。此外,内部存储器121可以包括高速随机存取存储器,还可以包括非易失性存储器,例如至少一个磁盘存储器件,闪存器件,通用闪存存储器(universal flash storage,UFS)等。Internal memory 121 may be used to store computer executable program code, which includes instructions. The processor 110 executes instructions stored in the internal memory 121 to execute various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device 100 . The internal memory 121 may include a program storage area and a data storage area. Among them, the stored program area can store an operating system, at least one application program required for a function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.). The storage data area may store data created during use of the electronic device 100 (such as audio data, phone book, etc.). In addition, the internal memory 121 may include high-speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as at least one disk storage device, flash memory device, universal flash storage (UFS), etc.
电子设备100可以通过音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,以及应用处理器等实现音频功能。例如音乐播放,录音等。The electronic device 100 can implement audio functions through the audio module 170, the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the headphone interface 170D, and the application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
音频模块170用于将数字音频信息转换成模拟音频信号输出,也用于将模拟音频输入转换为数字音频信号。音频模块170还可以用于对音频信号编码和解码。在一些示例中,音频模块170可以设置于处理器110中,或将音频模块170的部分功能模块设置于处理器110中。The audio module 170 is used to convert digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and is also used to convert analog audio input into digital audio signals. Audio module 170 may also be used to encode and decode audio signals. In some examples, the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110 , or some functional modules of the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110 .
扬声器170A,也称“喇叭”,用于将音频电信号转换为声音信号。电子设备100可以通过扬声器170A收听音乐,或收听免提通话。Speaker 170A, also called "speaker", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. The electronic device 100 can listen to music through the speaker 170A, or listen to hands-free calls.
受话器170B,也称“听筒”,用于将音频电信号转换成声音信号。当电子设备100接听电话或语音信息时,可以通过将受话器170B靠近人耳接听语音。Receiver 170B, also called "earpiece", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. When the electronic device 100 answers a call or a voice message, the voice can be heard by bringing the receiver 170B close to the human ear.
麦克风170C,也称“话筒”,“传声器”,用于将声音信号转换为电信号。当拨打电话或发送语音信息时,用户可以通过人嘴靠近麦克风170C发声,将声音信号输入到麦克风170C。电子设备100可以设置至少一个麦克风170C。在另一些示例中,电子设备100可以设置两个麦克风170C,除了采集声音信号,还可以 实现降噪功能。在另一些示例中,电子设备100还可以设置三个,四个或更多麦克风170C,实现采集声音信号,降噪,还可以识别声音来源,实现定向录音功能等。Microphone 170C, also called "microphone" or "microphone", is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals. When making a call or sending a voice message, the user can speak close to the microphone 170C with the human mouth and input the sound signal to the microphone 170C. The electronic device 100 may be provided with at least one microphone 170C. In other examples, the electronic device 100 may be provided with two microphones 170C. In addition to collecting sound signals, the electronic device 100 may also Implement noise reduction function. In other examples, the electronic device 100 can also be provided with three, four or more microphones 170C to collect sound signals, reduce noise, identify sound sources, implement directional recording functions, etc.
耳机接口170D用于连接有线耳机。耳机接口170D可以是USB接口130,也可以是3.5mm的开放移动终端设备平台(open mobile terminal platform,OMTP)标准接口,美国蜂窝电信工业协会(cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA,CTIA)标准接口。The headphone interface 170D is used to connect wired headphones. The headphone interface 170D may be a USB interface 130, or may be a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface or a Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association of the USA (CTIA) standard interface.
压力传感器180A用于感受压力信号,可以将压力信号转换成电信号。在一些示例中,压力传感器180A可以设置于显示屏194。压力传感器180A的种类很多,如电阻式压力传感器,电感式压力传感器,电容式压力传感器等。电容式压力传感器可以是包括至少两个具有导电材料的平行板。当有力作用于压力传感器180A,电极之间的电容改变。电子设备100根据电容的变化确定压力的强度。当有触摸操作作用于显示屏194,电子设备100根据压力传感器180A检测所述触摸操作强度。电子设备100也可以根据压力传感器180A的检测信号计算触摸的位置。在一些示例中,作用于相同触摸位置,但不同触摸操作强度的触摸操作,可以对应不同的操作指令。例如:当有触摸操作强度小于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时,执行查看短消息的指令。当有触摸操作强度大于或等于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时,执行新建短消息的指令。The pressure sensor 180A is used to sense pressure signals and can convert the pressure signals into electrical signals. In some examples, pressure sensor 180A may be disposed on display screen 194 . There are many types of pressure sensors 180A, such as resistive pressure sensors, inductive pressure sensors, capacitive pressure sensors, etc. A capacitive pressure sensor may include at least two parallel plates of conductive material. When a force is applied to pressure sensor 180A, the capacitance between the electrodes changes. The electronic device 100 determines the intensity of the pressure based on the change in capacitance. When a touch operation is performed on the display screen 194, the electronic device 100 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 180A. The electronic device 100 may also calculate the touched position based on the detection signal of the pressure sensor 180A. In some examples, touch operations acting on the same touch location but with different touch operation intensities can correspond to different operation instructions. For example: when a touch operation with a touch operation intensity less than the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction to view the short message is executed. When a touch operation with a touch operation intensity greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction to create a new short message is executed.
陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于确定电子设备100的运动姿态。在一些示例中,可以通过陀螺仪传感器180B确定电子设备100围绕三个轴(即,x,y和z轴)的角速度。陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于拍摄防抖。示例性的,当按下快门,陀螺仪传感器180B检测电子设备100抖动的角度,根据角度计算出镜头模组需要补偿的距离,让镜头通过反向运动抵消电子设备100的抖动,实现防抖。陀螺仪传感器180B还可以用于导航,体感游戏场景。The gyro sensor 180B may be used to determine the motion posture of the electronic device 100 . In some examples, the angular velocity of electronic device 100 about three axes (ie, x, y, and z axes) may be determined by gyro sensor 180B. The gyro sensor 180B can be used for image stabilization. For example, when the shutter is pressed, the gyro sensor 180B detects the angle at which the electronic device 100 shakes, calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate based on the angle, and allows the lens to offset the shake of the electronic device 100 through reverse movement to achieve anti-shake. The gyro sensor 180B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory game scenes.
气压传感器180C用于测量气压。在一些示例中,电子设备100通过气压传感器180C测得的气压值计算海拔高度,辅助定位和导航。Air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure. In some examples, the electronic device 100 calculates the altitude through the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 180C to assist positioning and navigation.
磁传感器180D包括霍尔传感器。电子设备100可以利用磁传感器180D检测翻盖皮套的开合。在一些示例中,当电子设备100是翻盖机时,电子设备100可以根据磁传感器180D检测翻盖的开合。进而根据检测到的皮套的开合状态或翻盖的开合状态,设置翻盖自动解锁等特性。Magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor. The electronic device 100 may utilize the magnetic sensor 180D to detect the opening and closing of the flip holster. In some examples, when the electronic device 100 is a flip machine, the electronic device 100 may detect opening and closing of the flip according to the magnetic sensor 180D. Then, based on the detected opening and closing status of the leather case or the opening and closing status of the flip cover, features such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
加速度传感器180E可检测电子设备100在各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小。当电子设备100静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向。还可以用于识别电子设备100姿态,应用于横竖屏切换,计步器等应用。The acceleration sensor 180E can detect the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes). When the electronic device 100 is stationary, the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected. It can also be used to identify the posture of the electronic device 100 and be used in horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometer and other applications.
距离传感器180F,用于测量距离。电子设备100可以通过红外或激光测量距离。在一些示例中,拍摄场景,电子设备100可以利用距离传感器180F测距以实现快速对焦。Distance sensor 180F for measuring distance. Electronic device 100 can measure distance via infrared or laser. In some examples, when shooting a scene, the electronic device 100 may utilize the distance sensor 180F to measure distance to achieve fast focusing.
接近光传感器180G可以包括例如发光二极管(LED)和光检测器,例如光电二极管。发光二极管可以是红外发光二极管。电子设备100通过发光二极管向外发射红外光。电子设备100使用光电二极管检测来自附近物体的红外反射光。当检测到充分的反射光时,可以确定电子设备100附近有物体。当检测到不充分的反射光时,电子设备100可以确定电子设备100附近没有物体。电子设备100可以利用接近光传感器180G检测用户手持电子设备100贴近耳朵通话,以便自动熄灭屏幕达到省电的目的。接近光传感器180G也可用于皮套模式,口袋模式自动解锁与锁屏。Proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, a light emitting diode (LED) and a light detector, such as a photodiode. The light emitting diode may be an infrared light emitting diode. The electronic device 100 emits infrared light outwardly through the light emitting diode. Electronic device 100 uses photodiodes to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it can be determined that there is an object near the electronic device 100 . When insufficient reflected light is detected, the electronic device 100 may determine that there is no object near the electronic device 100 . The electronic device 100 can use the proximity light sensor 180G to detect when the user holds the electronic device 100 close to the ear for talking, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power. The proximity light sensor 180G can also be used in holster mode, and pocket mode automatically unlocks and locks the screen.
环境光传感器180L用于感知环境光亮度。电子设备100可以根据感知的环境光亮度自适应调节显示屏194亮度。环境光传感器180L也可用于拍照时自动调节白平衡。环境光传感器180L还可以与接近光传感器180G配合,检测电子设备100是否在口袋里,以防误触。The ambient light sensor 180L is used to sense ambient light brightness. The electronic device 100 can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 194 according to the perceived ambient light brightness. The ambient light sensor 180L can also be used to automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures. The ambient light sensor 180L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 180G to detect whether the electronic device 100 is in the pocket to prevent accidental touching.
指纹传感器180H用于采集指纹。电子设备100可以利用采集的指纹特性实现指纹解锁,访问应用锁,指纹拍照,指纹接听来电等。Fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints. The electronic device 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to achieve fingerprint unlocking, access to application locks, fingerprint photography, fingerprint answering of incoming calls, etc.
温度传感器180J用于检测温度。在一些示例中,电子设备100利用温度传感器180J检测的温度,执行温度处理策略。例如,当温度传感器180J上报的温度超过阈值,电子设备100执行降低位于温度传感器180J附近的处理器的性能,以便降低功耗实施热保护。在另一些示例中,当温度低于另一阈值时,电子设备100对电池142加热,以避免低温导致电子设备100异常关机。在其他一些实施例中,当温度低于又一阈值时,电子设备100对电池142的输出电压执行升压,以避免低温导致的异常关机。Temperature sensor 180J is used to detect temperature. In some examples, the electronic device 100 utilizes the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 180J to execute the temperature processing strategy. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 180J exceeds a threshold, the electronic device 100 reduces the performance of a processor located near the temperature sensor 180J in order to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection. In other examples, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 heats the battery 142 to prevent the low temperature from causing the electronic device 100 to shut down abnormally. In some other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 performs boosting on the output voltage of the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown caused by low temperature.
触摸传感器180K,也称“触控面板(TouchPanel,TP)”。触摸传感器180K可以设置于显示屏194,由触摸传感器180K与显示屏194组成触摸屏,也称“触控屏”。触摸传感器180K用于检测作用于其上或附近的触摸操作。触摸传感器可以将检测到的触摸操作传递给应用处理器,以确定触摸事件类型。可以通过显示屏194提供与触摸操作相关的视觉输出。在另一些示例中,触摸传感器180K也可以设置于电子设备100 的表面,与显示屏194所处的位置不同。Touch sensor 180K, also called "Touch Panel (TP)". The touch sensor 180K can be disposed on the display screen 194. The touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194 form a touch screen, which is also called a "touch screen". The touch sensor 180K is used to detect a touch operation on or near the touch sensor 180K. The touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the touch event type. Visual output related to the touch operation may be provided through display screen 194 . In other examples, the touch sensor 180K may also be provided on the electronic device 100 The surface is different from the position where the display screen 194 is located.
骨传导传感器180M可以获取振动信号。在一些示例中,骨传导传感器180M可以获取人体声部振动骨块的振动信号。骨传导传感器180M也可以接触人体脉搏,接收血压跳动信号。在一些示例中,骨传导传感器180M也可以设置于耳机中,结合成骨传导耳机。音频模块170可以基于所述骨传导传感器180M获取的声部振动骨块的振动信号,解析出语音信号,实现语音功能。应用处理器可以基于所述骨传导传感器180M获取的血压跳动信号解析心率信息,实现心率检测功能。Bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals. In some examples, the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human body's vocal part. The bone conduction sensor 180M can also contact the human body's pulse and receive blood pressure beating signals. In some examples, the bone conduction sensor 180M may also be provided in an earphone and combined into a bone conduction earphone. The audio module 170 can analyze the voice signal based on the vibration signal of the vocal vibrating bone obtained by the bone conduction sensor 180M to implement the voice function. The application processor can analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beating signal acquired by the bone conduction sensor 180M to implement the heart rate detection function.
按键190包括开机键,音量键等。按键190可以是机械按键。也可以是触摸式按键。电子设备100可以接收按键输入,产生与电子设备100的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。The buttons 190 include a power button, a volume button, etc. Key 190 may be a mechanical key. It can also be a touch button. The electronic device 100 may receive key inputs and generate key signal inputs related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 100 .
马达191可以产生振动提示。马达191可以用于来电振动提示,也可以用于触摸振动反馈。例如,作用于不同应用(例如拍照,音频播放等)的触摸操作,可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。作用于显示屏194不同区域的触摸操作,马达191也可对应不同的振动反馈效果。不同的应用场景(例如:时间提醒,接收信息,闹钟,游戏等)也可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。触摸振动反馈效果还可以支持自定义。The motor 191 can generate vibration prompts. The motor 191 can be used for vibration prompts for incoming calls and can also be used for touch vibration feedback. For example, touch operations for different applications (such as taking pictures, audio playback, etc.) can correspond to different vibration feedback effects. The motor 191 can also respond to different vibration feedback effects for touch operations in different areas of the display screen 194 . Different application scenarios (such as time reminders, receiving information, alarm clocks, games, etc.) can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects. The touch vibration feedback effect can also be customized.
指示器192可以是指示灯,可以用于指示充电状态,电量变化,也可以用于指示消息,未接来电,通知等。The indicator 192 may be an indicator light, which may be used to indicate charging status, power changes, or may be used to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, etc.
SIM卡接口195用于连接SIM卡。SIM卡可以通过插入SIM卡接口195,或从SIM卡接口195拔出,实现和电子设备100的接触和分离。电子设备100可以支持1个或N个SIM卡接口,N为大于1的正整数。SIM卡接口195可以支持Nano SIM卡,Micro SIM卡,SIM卡等。同一个SIM卡接口195可以同时插入多张卡。所述多张卡的类型可以相同,也可以不同。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容不同类型的SIM卡。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容外部存储卡。电子设备100通过SIM卡和网络交互,实现通话以及数据通信等功能。在一些示例中,电子设备100采用eSIM,即:嵌入式SIM卡。eSIM卡可以嵌在电子设备100中,不能和电子设备100分离。The SIM card interface 195 is used to connect a SIM card. The SIM card can be connected to or separated from the electronic device 100 by inserting it into the SIM card interface 195 or pulling it out from the SIM card interface 195 . The electronic device 100 can support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, where N is a positive integer greater than 1. SIM card interface 195 can support Nano SIM card, Micro SIM card, SIM card, etc. Multiple cards can be inserted into the same SIM card interface 195 at the same time. The types of the plurality of cards may be the same or different. The SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with different types of SIM cards. The SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with external memory cards. The electronic device 100 interacts with the network through the SIM card to implement functions such as calls and data communications. In some examples, the electronic device 100 employs an eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card. The eSIM card can be embedded in the electronic device 100 and cannot be separated from the electronic device 100 .
应当理解的是,图14所示的电子设备100仅是一个范例,并且电子设备100可以具有比图14中所示的更多的或者更少的部件,可以组合两个或多个的部件,或者可以具有不同的部件配置。图14中所示出的各种部件可以在包括一个或多个信号处理和/或专用集成电路在内的硬件、软件、或硬件和软件的组合中实现。It should be understood that the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 14 is only an example, and the electronic device 100 may have more or fewer components than shown in FIG. 14 , and two or more components may be combined. Or could have different component configurations. The various components shown in Figure 14 may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits.
其中,电子设备200的结构可以与电子设备100的结构相同或相似,关于电子设备200的结构的相关内容可以参照图14所示的电子设备100的结构的相关文字描述,在此不再赘述。The structure of the electronic device 200 may be the same as or similar to the structure of the electronic device 100. For relevant content about the structure of the electronic device 200, refer to the relevant text description of the structure of the electronic device 100 shown in FIG. 14, and will not be described again here.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线)或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state disk,SSD))等。In the above embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, the processes or functions described in this application are generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. The computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another, e.g., the computer instructions may be transferred from a website, computer, server, or data center Transmission to another website, computer, server or data center through wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means. The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. that contains one or more available media integrated. The available media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disk, hard disk, magnetic tape), optical media (eg, DVD), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state disk (SSD)), etc.
本领域普通技术人员可以理解实现上述实施例方法中的全部或部分流程,该流程可以由计算机程序来指令相关的硬件完成,该程序可存储于计算机可读取存储介质中,该程序在执行时,可包括如上述各方法实施例的流程。而前述的存储介质包括:ROM或随机存储记忆体RAM、磁碟或者光盘等各种可存储程序代码的介质。Those of ordinary skill in the art can understand that all or part of the processes in the methods of the above embodiments are implemented. This process can be completed by instructing relevant hardware through a computer program. The program can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. When the program is executed, , may include the processes of the above method embodiments. The aforementioned storage media include: ROM, random access memory (RAM), magnetic disks, optical disks and other media that can store program codes.
以上实施例仅用以说明本申请的技术方案,而非对其限制;尽管参照前述实施例对本申请进行了详细的说明,本领域的普通技术人员应当理解:其依然可以对前述各实施例所记载的技术方案进行修改,或者对其中部分技术特征进行等同替换;而这些修改或者替换,并不使相应技术方案的本质脱离本申请各实施例技术方案的范围。 The above embodiments are only used to illustrate the technical solutions of the present application, but are not intended to limit them. Although the present application has been described in detail with reference to the foregoing embodiments, those of ordinary skill in the art should understand that they can still modify the technical solutions described in the foregoing embodiments. Modifications may be made to the recorded technical solutions, or equivalent substitutions may be made to some of the technical features; however, these modifications or substitutions do not cause the essence of the corresponding technical solutions to depart from the scope of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application.

Claims (25)

  1. 一种交互方法,应用于第一电子设备,其特征在于,所述方法包括:An interaction method, applied to a first electronic device, characterized in that the method includes:
    所述第一电子设备与第二电子设备建立通信连接;The first electronic device establishes a communication connection with the second electronic device;
    所述第一电子设备显示第一用户界面,所述第一用户界面为所述第一电子设备的桌面,所述第一用户界面中包括一个或多个应用程序的图标、一个或多个标识;The first electronic device displays a first user interface. The first user interface is the desktop of the first electronic device. The first user interface includes one or more application icons and one or more logos. ;
    其中,所述一个或多个应用程序的图标包括第一应用程序的图标,所述一个或多个标识包括第一标识和/或第二标识,所述第一标识用于指示所述第一电子设备接收第一数据的状态,所述第二标识用于指示所述第一电子设备接收所述第一数据的进度,所述第一数据是所述第二电子设备基于所述通信连接向所述第一电子设备发送的,所述第一数据为所述第一应用程序的数据。Wherein, the icon of the one or more application programs includes an icon of the first application program, and the one or more identifiers include a first identifier and/or a second identifier, and the first identifier is used to indicate the first The status of the electronic device receiving the first data, the second identifier is used to indicate the progress of the first electronic device receiving the first data, the first data is the second electronic device based on the communication connection. The first data sent by the first electronic device is the data of the first application program.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第一电子设备显示第一用户界面之后,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 1, wherein after the first electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further includes:
    在所述第一标识指示的状态为“待接收”状态,和/或,所述第二标识指示的进度为0的情况下,所述第一电子设备检测到用户针对所述第一应用程序的图标的第一操作;When the status indicated by the first identification is "to be received" and/or the progress indicated by the second identification is 0, the first electronic device detects that the user has requested the first application program. The first operation of the icon;
    响应于所述第一操作,所述第一电子设备优先接收所述第一数据,并将所述第一标识指示的状态由“待接收”状态修改为“优先接收”状态,和/或,将所述第二标识指示的进度由“0”修改为“大于0”;In response to the first operation, the first electronic device receives the first data with priority, and modifies the state indicated by the first identification from the "to be received" state to the "priority receiving" state, and/or, Modify the progress indicated by the second identifier from "0" to "greater than 0";
    所述第一电子设备向所述第二电子设备发送第一消息,所述第一消息用于指示所述第二电子设备向所述第一电子设备优先发送所述第一数据。The first electronic device sends a first message to the second electronic device, where the first message is used to instruct the second electronic device to send the first data to the first electronic device preferentially.
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第一电子设备显示第一用户界面之后,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 1, wherein after the first electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further includes:
    在所述第一标识指示的状态为“待接收”状态,和/或,所述第二标识指示的进度为0的情况下,所述第一电子设备检测到用户针对所述第一应用程序的图标的第二操作;When the status indicated by the first identification is "to be received" and/or the progress indicated by the second identification is 0, the first electronic device detects that the user has requested the first application program. The second operation of the icon;
    响应于所述第二操作,所述第一电子设备显示第一选项,所述第一选项用于指示所述第一电子设备停止接收所述第一数据;In response to the second operation, the first electronic device displays a first option, the first option is used to instruct the first electronic device to stop receiving the first data;
    所述第一电子设备检测到用户针对所述第一选项的第三操作;The first electronic device detects the user's third operation on the first option;
    响应于所述第三操作,所述第一电子设备停止接收所述第一数据,并取消显示所述第一标识和所述第二标识;In response to the third operation, the first electronic device stops receiving the first data and cancels display of the first identification and the second identification;
    所述第一电子设备向所述第二电子设备发送第二消息,所述第二消息用于指示所述第二电子设备向所述第一电子设备停止发送所述第一数据。The first electronic device sends a second message to the second electronic device, where the second message is used to instruct the second electronic device to stop sending the first data to the first electronic device.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第一电子设备停止接收所述第一数据之后,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 3, wherein after the first electronic device stops receiving the first data, the method further includes:
    所述第一电子设备检测到用户针对所述第一应用程序的图标的第四操作;The first electronic device detects a fourth operation by the user on the icon of the first application;
    响应于所述第四操作,所述第一电子设备显示第一窗口,所述第一窗口中包括一个或多个选项,所述一个或多个选项包括第二选项,所述第二选项用于指示所述第一电子设备继续接收所述第一数据;In response to the fourth operation, the first electronic device displays a first window, the first window includes one or more options, the one or more options include a second option, the second option is Instructing the first electronic device to continue receiving the first data;
    所述第一电子设备检测到用户针对所述第二选项的第五操作;The first electronic device detects the user's fifth operation on the second option;
    响应于所述第五操作,所述第一电子设备显示所述第一标识和所述第二标识,并向所述第二电子设备发送第三消息,所述第三消息用于指示所述第二电子设备向所述第一电子设备继续发送所述第一数据。In response to the fifth operation, the first electronic device displays the first logo and the second logo, and sends a third message to the second electronic device, where the third message is used to indicate that the The second electronic device continues to send the first data to the first electronic device.
  5. 根据权利要求1-4任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一用户界面中还包括第一文件夹、第三标识和/或第四标识,所述第一文件夹中包括一个或多个第二应用程序的图标,所述第三标识用于指示所述第一电子设备接收第二数据的状态,所述第四标识用于指示所述第一电子设备接收所述第二数据的进度,所述第二数据是所述第二电子设备基于所述通信连接向所述第一电子设备发送的,所述第二数据为一个或多个第二应用程序的数据。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, characterized in that the first user interface further includes a first folder, a third identifier and/or a fourth identifier, and the first folder includes Icons of one or more second applications, the third identification is used to indicate the status of the first electronic device receiving the second data, and the fourth identification is used to indicate the first electronic device receiving the second data. Progress of two data, the second data is sent by the second electronic device to the first electronic device based on the communication connection, and the second data is data of one or more second applications.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第一电子设备显示第一用户界面之后,所述方法 还包括:The method of claim 5, wherein after the first electronic device displays the first user interface, the method Also includes:
    在所述第三标识指示的状态为“待接收”状态,和/或,所述第四标识指示的进度为0的情况下,所述第一电子设备检测到用户针对所述第一文件夹的第六操作;When the status indicated by the third identification is "to be received", and/or the progress indicated by the fourth identification is 0, the first electronic device detects that the user has requested the first folder. The sixth operation;
    响应于所述第六操作,所述第一电子设备优先接收所述第二数据,并将所述第三标识指示的状态由“待接收”状态修改为“优先接收”状态,和/或,将所述第四标识指示的进度由“0”修改为“大于0”;In response to the sixth operation, the first electronic device receives the second data with priority, and modifies the state indicated by the third identification from the "to be received" state to the "priority receiving" state, and/or, Modify the progress indicated by the fourth identifier from "0" to "greater than 0";
    所述第一电子设备向所述第二电子设备发送第四消息,所述第四消息用于指示所述第二电子设备向所述第一电子设备优先发送所述第二数据。The first electronic device sends a fourth message to the second electronic device, where the fourth message is used to instruct the second electronic device to send the second data to the first electronic device preferentially.
  7. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第一电子设备显示第一用户界面之后,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 5, wherein after the first electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further includes:
    在所述第三标识指示的状态为“待接收”状态,和/或,所述第四标识指示的进度为0的情况下,所述第一电子设备检测到用户针对所述第一文件夹的第七操作;When the status indicated by the third identification is "to be received", and/or the progress indicated by the fourth identification is 0, the first electronic device detects that the user has requested the first folder. The seventh operation;
    响应于所述第七操作,所述第一电子设备显示第三选项,所述第三选项用于指示所述第一电子设备停止接收所述第二数据;In response to the seventh operation, the first electronic device displays a third option, the third option being used to instruct the first electronic device to stop receiving the second data;
    所述第一电子设备检测到用户针对所述第三选项的第八操作;The first electronic device detects the user's eighth operation on the third option;
    响应于所述第八操作,所述第一电子设备停止接收所述第二数据,并取消显示所述第三标识和所述第四标识;In response to the eighth operation, the first electronic device stops receiving the second data and cancels display of the third identification and the fourth identification;
    所述第一电子设备向所述第二电子设备发送第五消息,所述第五消息用于指示所述第二电子设备向所述第一电子设备停止发送所述第二数据。The first electronic device sends a fifth message to the second electronic device, where the fifth message is used to instruct the second electronic device to stop sending the second data to the first electronic device.
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第一电子设备停止接收所述第二数据之后,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 7, wherein after the first electronic device stops receiving the second data, the method further includes:
    所述第一电子设备检测到用户针对所述第一文件夹的第九操作;The first electronic device detects the user's ninth operation on the first folder;
    响应于所述第九操作,所述第一电子设备显示第二窗口,所述第二窗口中包括一个或多个选项,所述一个或多个选项包括第四选项,所述第四选项用于指示所述第一电子设备继续接收所述第二数据;In response to the ninth operation, the first electronic device displays a second window, the second window includes one or more options, the one or more options include a fourth option, the fourth option is Instructing the first electronic device to continue receiving the second data;
    所述第一电子设备检测到用户针对所述第四选项的第十操作;The first electronic device detects the user's tenth operation on the fourth option;
    响应于所述第十操作,所述第一电子设备显示所述第三标识和所述第四标识,并向所述第二电子设备发送第六消息,所述第六消息用于指示所述第二电子设备向所述第一电子设备继续发送所述第二数据。In response to the tenth operation, the first electronic device displays the third identification and the fourth identification, and sends a sixth message to the second electronic device, the sixth message being used to indicate the The second electronic device continues to send the second data to the first electronic device.
  9. 根据权利要求1-8任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一用户界面中还包括第一提示,所述第一提示用于提示用户所述第一电子设备正在接收所述第二电子设备发送的所述一个或多个应用程序的数据,并靠近放置所述第一电子设备和所述第二电子设备。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 8, characterized in that the first user interface further includes a first prompt, the first prompt is used to prompt the user that the first electronic device is receiving the The second electronic device sends the data of the one or more applications and is placed close to the first electronic device and the second electronic device.
  10. 根据权利要求1-9任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第一电子设备显示第一用户界面之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-9, characterized in that, before the first electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further includes:
    所述第一电子设备显示第二用户界面,所述第二用户界面为第三应用程序的界面,所述第三应用程序用于所述第一电子设备接收所述第二电子设备发送的所述一个或多个应用程序的数据;The first electronic device displays a second user interface, the second user interface is an interface of a third application program, and the third application program is used by the first electronic device to receive all information sent by the second electronic device. Describes data for one or more applications;
    所述第一电子设备检测到用户的第十一操作,所述第十一操作用于指示所述第一电子设备显示所述第一用户界面。The first electronic device detects an eleventh operation of the user, and the eleventh operation is used to instruct the first electronic device to display the first user interface.
  11. 一种交互方法,应用于第二电子设备,其特征在于,所述方法包括:An interaction method, applied to a second electronic device, characterized in that the method includes:
    所述第二电子设备与第一电子设备建立通信连接;The second electronic device establishes a communication connection with the first electronic device;
    所述第二电子设备显示第一用户界面,所述第一用户界面为所述第二电子设备的桌面,所述第一用户界面中包括一个或多个应用程序的图标、一个或多个标识;The second electronic device displays a first user interface. The first user interface is the desktop of the second electronic device. The first user interface includes one or more application icons and one or more logos. ;
    其中,所述一个或多个应用程序的图标包括第一应用程序的图标,所述一个或多个标识包括第一标识和/或第二标识,所述第一标识用于指示所述第二电子设备发送第一数据的状态,所述第二标识用于指示所述第二电子设备发送所述第一数据的进度,所述第一数据是所述第二电子设备基于所述通信连接向所述第一电子设备发送的,所述第一数据为所述第一应用程序的数据。 Wherein, the icon of the one or more application programs includes an icon of the first application program, and the one or more identifiers include a first identifier and/or a second identifier, and the first identifier is used to indicate the second identifier. The status of the electronic device sending the first data, the second identifier is used to indicate the progress of the second electronic device sending the first data, the first data is the second electronic device based on the communication connection to The first data sent by the first electronic device is the data of the first application program.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第二电子设备显示第一用户界面之后,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 11, wherein after the second electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further includes:
    在所述第一标识指示的状态为“待发送”状态,和/或,所述第二标识指示的进度为0的情况下,所述第二电子设备检测到用户针对所述第一应用程序的图标的第一操作;When the status indicated by the first identification is "to be sent" and/or the progress indicated by the second identification is 0, the second electronic device detects that the user has requested the first application program. The first operation of the icon;
    响应于所述第一操作,所述第二电子设备优先发送所述第一数据,并将所述第一标识指示的状态由“待发送”状态修改为“优先发送”状态,和/或,将所述第二标识指示的进度由“0”修改为“大于0”;In response to the first operation, the second electronic device sends the first data with priority, and changes the state indicated by the first identification from the "to be sent" state to the "priority sending" state, and/or, Modify the progress indicated by the second identifier from "0" to "greater than 0";
    所述第二电子设备向所述第一电子设备发送第一消息,所述第一消息用于指示所述第一电子设备优先接收所述第二电子设备发送的所述第一数据。The second electronic device sends a first message to the first electronic device, where the first message is used to instruct the first electronic device to preferentially receive the first data sent by the second electronic device.
  13. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第二电子设备显示第一用户界面之后,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 11, wherein after the second electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further includes:
    在所述第一标识指示的状态为“待发送”状态,和/或,所述第二标识指示的进度为0的情况下,所述第二电子设备检测到用户针对所述第一应用程序的图标的第二操作;When the status indicated by the first identification is "to be sent" and/or the progress indicated by the second identification is 0, the second electronic device detects that the user has requested the first application program. The second operation of the icon;
    响应于所述第二操作,所述第二电子设备显示第一选项,所述第一选项用于指示所述第二电子设备停止发送所述第一数据;In response to the second operation, the second electronic device displays a first option, the first option is used to instruct the second electronic device to stop sending the first data;
    所述第一电子设备检测到用户针对所述第一选项的第三操作;The first electronic device detects the user's third operation on the first option;
    响应于所述第三操作,所述第二电子设备停止发送所述第一数据,并取消显示所述第一标识和所述第二标识;In response to the third operation, the second electronic device stops sending the first data and cancels display of the first identification and the second identification;
    所述第二电子设备向所述第一电子设备发送第二消息,所述第二消息用于指示所述第一电子设备停止接收所述第二电子设备发送的所述第一数据。The second electronic device sends a second message to the first electronic device, where the second message is used to instruct the first electronic device to stop receiving the first data sent by the second electronic device.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第二电子设备停止发送所述第一数据之后,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 13, wherein after the second electronic device stops sending the first data, the method further includes:
    所述第二电子设备检测到用户针对所述第一应用程序的图标的第四操作;The second electronic device detects a fourth operation by the user on the icon of the first application;
    响应于所述第四操作,所述第二电子设备显示第一窗口,所述第一窗口中包括一个或多个选项,所述一个或多个选项包括第二选项,所述第二选项用于指示所述第二电子设备继续发送所述第一数据;In response to the fourth operation, the second electronic device displays a first window, the first window includes one or more options, the one or more options include a second option, the second option is Instructing the second electronic device to continue sending the first data;
    所述第一电子设备检测到用户针对所述第二选项的第五操作;The first electronic device detects the user's fifth operation on the second option;
    响应于所述第五操作,所述第二电子设备显示所述第一标识和所述第二标识,并向所述第一电子设备发送第三消息,所述第三消息用于指示所述第一电子设备继续接收所述第二电子设备发送的所述第一数据。In response to the fifth operation, the second electronic device displays the first logo and the second logo, and sends a third message to the first electronic device, where the third message is used to indicate that the The first electronic device continues to receive the first data sent by the second electronic device.
  15. 根据权利要求11-14任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一用户界面中还包括第一文件夹、第三标识和/或第四标识,所述第一文件夹中包括一个或多个第二应用程序的图标,所述第三标识用于指示所述第一电子设备接收第二数据的状态,所述第四标识用于指示所述第一电子设备接收所述第二数据的进度,所述第二数据是所述第二电子设备基于所述通信连接向所述第一电子设备发送的,所述第二数据为所述一个或多个第二应用程序的数据。The method according to any one of claims 11 to 14, characterized in that the first user interface further includes a first folder, a third identifier and/or a fourth identifier, and the first folder includes Icons of one or more second applications, the third identification is used to indicate the status of the first electronic device receiving the second data, and the fourth identification is used to indicate the first electronic device receiving the second data. Progress of two data, the second data is sent by the second electronic device to the first electronic device based on the communication connection, and the second data is data of the one or more second applications. .
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第一电子设备显示第一用户界面之后,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 15, wherein after the first electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further includes:
    在所述第三标识指示的状态为“待发送”状态,和/或,所述第四标识指示的进度为0的情况下,所述第一电子设备检测到用户针对所述第一文件夹的第六操作;When the status indicated by the third identification is the "to be sent" state, and/or the progress indicated by the fourth identification is 0, the first electronic device detects that the user's request for the first folder is The sixth operation;
    响应于所述第六操作,所述第二电子设备优先发送所述第二数据,并将所述第三标识指示的状态由“待接收”状态修改为“优先接收”状态,和/或,将所述第四标识指示的进度由“0”修改为“大于0”;In response to the sixth operation, the second electronic device sends the second data with priority, and modifies the state indicated by the third identification from the "to be received" state to the "priority receiving" state, and/or, Modify the progress indicated by the fourth identifier from "0" to "greater than 0";
    所述第二电子设备向所述第一电子设备发送第四消息,所述第四消息用于指示所述第一电子设备优先接收所述第二电子设备发送的所述第二数据。The second electronic device sends a fourth message to the first electronic device, where the fourth message is used to instruct the first electronic device to preferentially receive the second data sent by the second electronic device.
  17. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第一电子设备显示第一用户界面之后,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 15, wherein after the first electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further includes:
    在所述第三标识指示的状态为“待接收”状态,和/或,所述第四标识指示的进度为0的情况下,所述第一电子设备检测到用户针对所述第一文件夹的第七操作; When the status indicated by the third identification is "to be received", and/or the progress indicated by the fourth identification is 0, the first electronic device detects that the user has requested the first folder. The seventh operation;
    响应于所述第七操作,所述第一电子设备显示第三选项,所述第三选项用于指示所述第二电子设备停止发送所述第二数据;In response to the seventh operation, the first electronic device displays a third option, the third option being used to instruct the second electronic device to stop sending the second data;
    所述第一电子设备检测到用户针对所述第三选项的第八操作;The first electronic device detects the user's eighth operation on the third option;
    响应于所述第八操作,所述第一电子设备停止发送所述第二数据,并取消显示所述第三标识和所述第四标识;In response to the eighth operation, the first electronic device stops sending the second data and cancels display of the third identification and the fourth identification;
    所述第二电子设备向所述第一电子设备发送第五消息,所述第五消息用于指示所述第一电子设备停止接收所述第二电子设备发送的所述第二数据。The second electronic device sends a fifth message to the first electronic device, where the fifth message is used to instruct the first electronic device to stop receiving the second data sent by the second electronic device.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第二电子设备停止发送所述第二数据之后,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 17, wherein after the second electronic device stops sending the second data, the method further includes:
    所述第一电子设备检测到用户针对所述第一文件夹的第九操作;The first electronic device detects the user's ninth operation on the first folder;
    响应于所述第九操作,所述第一电子设备显示第二窗口,所述第二窗口中包括一个或多个选项,所述一个或多个选项包括第四选项,所述第四选项用于指示所述第二电子设备继续发送所述第二数据;In response to the ninth operation, the first electronic device displays a second window, the second window includes one or more options, the one or more options include a fourth option, the fourth option is Instructing the second electronic device to continue sending the second data;
    所述第一电子设备检测到用户针对所述第四选项的第十操作;The first electronic device detects the user's tenth operation on the fourth option;
    响应于所述第十操作,所述第二电子设备显示所述第三标识和所述第四标识,并向所述第一电子设备发送第六消息,所述第六消息用于指示所述第一电子设备继续接收所述第二电子设备发送的所述第二数据。In response to the tenth operation, the second electronic device displays the third identification and the fourth identification, and sends a sixth message to the first electronic device, the sixth message being used to indicate the The first electronic device continues to receive the second data sent by the second electronic device.
  19. 根据权利要求11-18任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一用户界面中还包括第一提示,所述第一提示用于提示用户所述第二电子设备正在向所述第一电子设备发送所述一个或多个应用程序的数据,并靠近放置所述第一电子设备和所述第二电子设备。The method according to any one of claims 11 to 18, characterized in that the first user interface further includes a first prompt, the first prompt is used to prompt the user that the second electronic device is sending data to the A first electronic device transmits data of the one or more applications and is placed in close proximity to the first electronic device and the second electronic device.
  20. 根据权利要求11-19任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第二电子设备显示第一用户界面之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 11-19, characterized in that, before the second electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further includes:
    所述第二电子设备显示第二用户界面,所述第二用户界面为第三应用程序的界面,所述第三应用程序用于所述第二电子设备向所述第二电子设备发送所述一个或多个应用程序的数据;The second electronic device displays a second user interface, the second user interface is an interface of a third application program, and the third application program is used by the second electronic device to send the Data from one or more applications;
    所述第二电子设备检测到用户的第十一操作,所述第十一操作用于指示所述第二电子设备显示所述第一用户界面。The second electronic device detects an eleventh operation of the user, and the eleventh operation is used to instruct the second electronic device to display the first user interface.
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二用户界面中包括所述一个或多个应用程序的选项,所述一个或多个应用程序的选项按照第一顺序排列,所述第一顺序是系统预设的,或,所述第一顺序是系统基于用户使用所述一个或多个应用程序的频率设置的,或,所述第一顺序是用户手动设置的;所述第一顺序用于指示所述第二电子设备向所述第一电子设备发送所述一个或多个应用程序的数据的顺序。The method of claim 20, wherein the second user interface includes options for the one or more application programs, and the options for the one or more application programs are arranged in a first order, and the The first order is preset by the system, or the first order is set by the system based on the frequency with which the user uses the one or more applications, or the first order is manually set by the user; A sequence is used to indicate the order in which the second electronic device sends data of the one or more application programs to the first electronic device.
  22. 根据权利要求11-21任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第二电子设备显示第一用户界面之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 11-21, characterized in that, after the second electronic device displays the first user interface, the method further includes:
    所述第二电子设备取消显示所述第一标识和所述第二标识,并在所述第一用户界面中显示第五标识,所述第五标识用于指示所述第二电子设备发送完成所述第一数据,且所述第一电子设备未接收完成所述第一数据。The second electronic device cancels the display of the first logo and the second logo, and displays a fifth logo in the first user interface. The fifth logo is used to indicate that the second electronic device has completed sending. The first data, and the first electronic device has not completed receiving the first data.
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第二电子设备在所述第一用户界面中显示第五标识之后,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 22, wherein after the second electronic device displays a fifth identification in the first user interface, the method further includes:
    所述第二电子设备在所述第一用户界面中显示第六标识,所述第六标识用于指示所述第一应用程序生成了第三数据;The second electronic device displays a sixth identification in the first user interface, the sixth identification being used to indicate that the first application program has generated third data;
    所述第二电子设备检测到用户的第十二操作;The second electronic device detects the user's twelfth operation;
    响应于所述第十二操作,所述第二电子设备向所述第一电子设备发送所述第三数据。In response to the twelfth operation, the second electronic device sends the third data to the first electronic device.
  24. 一种电子设备,其特征在于,所述电子设备包括一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器;其中,所述一个或多个存储器与所述一个或多个处理器耦合,所述一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令,当所述一个或多个处理器执行所述计算机指令时,使得所述电子设 备执行如权利要求1-10或11-23中任一项所述的方法。An electronic device, characterized in that the electronic device includes one or more processors and one or more memories; wherein the one or more memories are coupled to the one or more processors, and the one or multiple memories for storing computer program code that includes computer instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors, cause the electronic device to Be prepared to perform the method according to any one of claims 1-10 or 11-23.
  25. 一种计算机存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机存储介质存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序包括程序指令,当所述程序指令在电子设备上运行时,使得所述电子设备执行如权利要求1-10或11-23中任一项所述的方法。 A computer storage medium, characterized in that the computer storage medium stores a computer program, and the computer program includes program instructions. When the program instructions are run on an electronic device, the electronic device causes the electronic device to execute the instructions as claimed in claim 1 -The method described in any one of 10 or 11-23.
PCT/CN2023/102184 2022-06-27 2023-06-25 Interaction method and related device WO2024001972A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202210739173.XA CN117331471A (en) 2022-06-27 2022-06-27 Interaction method and related equipment
CN202210739173.X 2022-06-27

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024001972A1 true WO2024001972A1 (en) 2024-01-04

Family

ID=89294030

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/102184 WO2024001972A1 (en) 2022-06-27 2023-06-25 Interaction method and related device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN117331471A (en)
WO (1) WO2024001972A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20200379946A1 (en) * 2019-05-30 2020-12-03 Apple Inc. Device, method, and graphical user interface for migrating data to a first device during a new device set-up workflow
CN112204522A (en) * 2019-09-25 2021-01-08 深圳市大疆创新科技有限公司 File downloading control method, terminal, system, movable platform and storage medium
CN114339966A (en) * 2021-12-23 2022-04-12 杭州逗酷软件科技有限公司 Interface control method, device, medium and electronic equipment for data transmission
CN114390501A (en) * 2022-03-22 2022-04-22 荣耀终端有限公司 Data transmission method and electronic equipment

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20200379946A1 (en) * 2019-05-30 2020-12-03 Apple Inc. Device, method, and graphical user interface for migrating data to a first device during a new device set-up workflow
CN112204522A (en) * 2019-09-25 2021-01-08 深圳市大疆创新科技有限公司 File downloading control method, terminal, system, movable platform and storage medium
CN114339966A (en) * 2021-12-23 2022-04-12 杭州逗酷软件科技有限公司 Interface control method, device, medium and electronic equipment for data transmission
CN114390501A (en) * 2022-03-22 2022-04-22 荣耀终端有限公司 Data transmission method and electronic equipment

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN117331471A (en) 2024-01-02

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP3872807B1 (en) Voice control method and electronic device
CN110471639B (en) Display method and related device
WO2021052263A1 (en) Voice assistant display method and device
WO2020259452A1 (en) Full-screen display method for mobile terminal, and apparatus
WO2020224485A1 (en) Screen capture method and electronic device
WO2021036571A1 (en) Desktop editing method and electronic device
EP3872609A1 (en) Application display method and electronic device
WO2021213164A1 (en) Application interface interaction method, electronic device, and computer readable storage medium
WO2021000804A1 (en) Display method and apparatus in locked state
WO2019072178A1 (en) Method for processing notification, and electronic device
US11856128B2 (en) Method for presenting video on electronic device when there is incoming call and electronic device
WO2022068483A1 (en) Application startup method and apparatus, and electronic device
WO2022017393A1 (en) Display interaction system, display method, and device
WO2022037726A1 (en) Split-screen display method and electronic device
CN113311975A (en) Application interaction method among multiple devices and related devices
EP4290346A1 (en) File management method, electronic device, and computer-readable storage medium
WO2021143391A1 (en) Video call-based screen sharing method and mobile device
CN114115770A (en) Display control method and related device
CN113805797A (en) Network resource processing method, electronic device and computer readable storage medium
WO2022143180A1 (en) Collaborative display method, terminal device, and computer readable storage medium
EP4163782A1 (en) Cross-device desktop management method, first electronic device, and second electronic device
CN114327175B (en) Information sharing method and device
US20240168603A1 (en) Card Display Method, Electronic Device, and Computer-Readable Storage Medium
WO2024001972A1 (en) Interaction method and related device
WO2023116411A1 (en) Management method for application card, electronic device, and storage medium

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23830150

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1